137
----------------- On the basis of a level of general education reached at the Higher School Certificate examination, the College tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student should acquire: (a) a knowledge of the curriculum subjects in his particular field sufficient to enable him to commence .. teaching effectively and with confidence; (b) a knowledge of developmental psychology and educational prin- ciples providing a basis for sensitivity to the needs of children and understanding of the educative process; (c) growth in personal development'involving scholarship, emotional maturity, cultivated tastes and a sense of social responsibility. (d) a feeling of commitment to the profession of teaching. THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION" The course of preparation for many teachers is of two years' duration but is being extended to three years. At first it is expected that the third year -of preparation· will not be provided at this college as a year of full-time attendance but as a conversion course taken by part-time attendance at the college in the evening after commencement of duty as a teacher. Each course year will be' conSidered as the equivalent of half a full-time year. The Conversion Courses are to be provided for teachers"already in the service who have two..;year qualifications and wish to obtain three-year qualifications without undertaking university studies. (Four university subjects passed after· completing two-year preparation grants three-year status and the college conversion courses ate an· - alternative method.--' It is hoped that means will be found to provide these conversion courses, except for practical subjects, by correspondence and it is hoped also that in time means will be found to provide a further two part-time attendance years or equivalent correspondence courses to permit converting three-year qualifications to four-year qualifications.) At present, however, we have for many of our courses only two years of preparation with the promise of a third year to come either by full-time attendance or by part-time conversion courses.

THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    5

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

-----------------

On the basis of a level of general education reached at the Higher School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' -

During his preparation at College,:·the student should acquire:

(a) a knowledge of the curriculum subjects in his particular field sufficient to enable him to commence .. teaching effectively and with confidence;

(b) a knowledge of developmental psychology and educational prin­ciples providing a basis for sensitivity to the needs of children and understanding of the educative process;

(c) growth in personal development'involving scholarship, emotional maturity, cultivated tastes and a sense of social responsibility.

(d) a feeling of commitment to the profession of teaching.

THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION"

The course of preparation for many teachers is of two years' duration but is being extended to three years. At first it is expected that the third year -of preparation· will not be provided at this college as a year of full-time attendance but as a conversion course taken by part-time attendance at the college in the evening after commencement of duty as a teacher. Each part~time course year will be' conSidered as the equivalent of half a full-time year. The Conversion Courses are to be provided for teachers"already in the service who have two..;year qualifications and wish to obtain three-year qualifications without undertaking university studies. (Four university subjects passed after· completing two-year preparation grants three-year status and the college conversion courses ate an· -alternative method.--' It is hoped that means will be found to provide these conversion courses, except for practical subjects, by correspondence and it is hoped also that in time means will be found to provide a further two part-time attendance years or equivalent correspondence courses to permit converting three-year qualifications to four-year qualifications.)

At present, however, we have for many of our courses only two years of preparation with the promise of a third year to come either by full-time attendance or by part-time conversion courses.

Page 2: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

C 0 .N· T· EN .. T S

.. ~.:

Teacher's Certificate {2...;year) ... Primary Course" .. 0 •• o ••••••••

Details of Subjects - 2-year - Primary Course ..•. 0 ••••••••••••

Teacher'sCe·rtificate (Z-year)- Infant Teaching ......•.• 0 • 0 •• 0 •

Details of Subjects - 2-year - Infant Teaching ................. ~ . .' ','

Teacher's Certificate (2-year) '- Geography/Commerce .... 0 ••• 0 •••

Details of Subjects - 2-year - Geography/Commerce ..•.......•.

Teacher's Certificate (2-year) -' Mathematics ........•.•....... 0

Details of Subjects - 2-year- Ivlathem.atics ... 0 •••••••••••••••••

Teacher's Certificate (2.-year) - Science Details.:of Subjects - Z-year -'Science

Teacher's Certificate (3-year) - Home Science/Textiles ........ 0 •

Details of Subjects - 3-year - Home Science/Textiles ..... 0 •• 0 •• 0

Teacher's Certificate (3-year) - Industrial Arts ..... o~· ......... .

Details of Subjects - 3-year - Industrial Arts . 0 •• 0 •• 0 •• 0 •••••• 0 •

... ';"

Page

1 3

26 2.7

35 36

44 45

51 5~

61 62.

71 72

Diploma in ArtEdu~ation. . .......•. 0 ••••••••••• ~ ~ •••••• 0 • 0 • •• 90 Diploma in Art Education: Honours Diploma ......... 0 •• 0 • • • • •• '91 " Details of Subjects for Diploma in Art Education' . 0 •• '0' ••••••••• ' • 92 :. Diploma in Art Education .. 2-year Conversion (Professional)

Course ............................ 101" Art ConversionCoursefol:' 2-year Trained Teachers .. '0' ••• ; ••.•. ' 102

Diploma in kusic Education ......... 0 •• "0 • '0 •• 0 ••••• 0 •• 0 •• ~ ••

Details of Subjects Prescribed for Diploma in Music Education ... 0

Diploma in Music Education - 2-year Conversion (Professional) Course ............ ~ . " ........ .

Teacher's Certificate (2-year Status) - Industrial Arts Artisan 00 ••

Details of Subjects' - 2-year Status - Industrial Arts Artisan .. 0 •••

103 104

115

116 117

Teacher's Certificate (2-year. 3-year, 4-year) Primary Teaching I Infant Teaching I Secondary Teaching .... o. 12.2

Details of Subjects - 2-year, 3-year, 4-year - 1969 .. o. 0 0.0 •• 0 •• 122 One- Year Professional Courses (XU) Proposed for 1970 .. 0 •• 0 •••• 133

;;;

. ~ ;

:', ,',

Page 3: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

·',,"r:;'

ALLOCATIONS OF L~CTURE .HOURS TO SUBJECTS 1969

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (2 YEARS) - PRIMARY COURSE .. ':." ' ;.:, ~ "':": J, ,".: ': \

YEAR I j YEAR II !'.'

SUBJECT Hrs/wk SUBJECT .I~rslwk •.

Art I Craft I Education I English I Health Education I Mathematics I Music I Physical Education. ~,.,. Science I '

. ", . \ j : ~:: ~' !.', '.

Social Science I Demonstrations '1 :,' Option I

'. i '.,

Totals

o 2 4 4 o 2 2 1 Z, 2 ..

.: 2 2

23

"

Art tt., Cr~fts"II Educa tion II English II Health Educati()n II IViathematic,s n: . Music II Physic~.l. E,ducation 11,:[,,:':

l 1 4 4

.,1'

'):'. :,2 2,

Scie.~ce IT.' .,: 'h;;.; '.' " :.' 1 .. . Soci~ Science II',~ j L

" I : ~ . , ::."" '.

DemonstJ'ations IIt, . (, I : ~ '. . '," .'. ..... .

Option IT

", -

·2·.·. 2 Z

Total' " .' ,.', " !;~:tJ~3' " " ,:,~.

Notes on the Primary Teaching Course:;,::",,~ ~!;'" .: L

c.,

Supplementary and Qualifying Subjects: i: 'H:! : :)'.'::~.i II 'i .

Incoming students are tested in reading. spellin:g:~'~'iipr:e~slori an~: '>; arithmetical skills and if weaknesses are revealedinaiiy"student'splfepara#on in these fields he may be required to attend'up'tOt-Wo hbu.rs 'perwe:e'k in .' . supplementary courses designed tc> correct these weakri'essEts.' , "

Supplementary course s a re provided on bO.th ,tutorial and class bases; in the following areas:

Arithmetic Fundamentals .. Readin~ ~~Ul,S: . . .,. , .. j :i" Spelling' . Spoken English Written English

; . ~ '"

. ~ ().:

': ! _ J ( ,','. '; \ ,I

. '.. ;',; ~ . :,-~

I. '

Tutor-i""ls.b . .T:-; ', .. ,',:,,-' '>':1 ',' , .. ~ ..... '.~ .t ';:~J. ~:, :';' ,D.'" (~J ~n ; I \ '.' . ~ , !~ .:.1 ::"J : ; .l·

As staff and time permit tutorial assistance may be .~i'ranged in the work of any subject. Attendance at tutorials may be v'oluntary b~t since tutorials are designed to help students those who fail to take advantage of them must be sure that they can cope with the work without assistance.

Demonstrations and Observations in Schools:

Demonstrations are arranged as shown in the timetable or as organised by lecturers in teaching methods. Students are informed by the lecturer responsible concerning the times. dates and arrangements for demonstrations and obs~rvation of school teaching. routines and practical policy. Demonstrations are given by teachers specially chosen for the work in selected schools in such a way as to co-ordinate the work demon­strated with College lecture prograiOmes.

Options:

Every student must select an "Option" subject in each year of the course. The option subjects are listed below. An option subject is intended to provide an opportunity for variety. initiative and depth in a course which

Page 4: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

consists almost' ~;"tirely of com:pulsory unjts. For examination and progressio: purposes the option subject ranks equally with all other subjects to which similar time allocation is made.

List of Option Subjects:

Year.I: Art I 0 : Practical ~rt Craft lOa: Extension of Primary Crafts I Education I Oa: Clinical Education Education lOb: Exceptional Children Education I Oc: Psychology' " >

English lOa: Drama English I Ob: Literature Language 1 Oa: Elementary Gerrnan Language lOb: Latin Music 1 0: Elementa'ry: Harin6nf~ History and Appreciation Physical Education 10&: PhysiCal Tests and Measurements Physical Education I :Ob:Physical 'Tests and Measurements Social Science 10: An Exterision 6f the Primary Social Science I

Year 11: Art--Jl<}-:-Pra'cticalArt Crafts.II 0: Advanced Primary Crafts E·ducati-on --11 Oa: Clinical Education .. Education II Ob: Psychology Education 11 Oc: The Slow Learner

".':

English.l:l. qa.: .. D.~~ma ... { . >r·.~' :'. ~ Engli$h:'ii bb:il..ite,ra~u.:r.e. . .. :.... .' :,:.:' '.' ..",

. Phy$i~ili Educa.tion ~1 Qa: I;~eDance ," ..... Physical Educatfon ,1I ()b: GaIt;lesancl A,thletic. Social Science II Oa: Geography pocial Science II Ob: History

Practic e Teaching:

; ; •. j.'.

~;' ; '.

-,'!

i. :

,';"0" .

Students are required to complete satisfactorily the follo~lng periods . , .

of practical teaching:

Year I : 3 weeks towards the end of 1st term 3 weeks towards the end of 3rd te rm

:1 .... , i.

Yea.r 11 : Z weeks in February before College resumes - "Home" Pra~tice .3 weeks towar~s,t~f~;endo£ 1st ter,m 3 week.s. tq'Y~,rds the. i~;nd,of 3rd. ter,m·

Page 5: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

3

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED :fOR TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE

.-2-YEAR - PRIIVlARY TEACHING , ;; . ~ (.; r 1 " .: '. : j :'"; j

PART I YEAR I .\ .. ". )) t·'··

ART I Primary Art 2 hours per week

Not offered in 1969.

CRAFTS I : Crafts for the Primary and Infant Teacher 2 hours per week

" (,

This course is the first pa}t o! a two-year course designed with, the following obje'ctsin mind: ','. "..,

1. To acquaInt students with the tools and; materi~ls <>:n issue in the schools • 2. To have students practise, and acquire, the basic skills associated with

the use of the se tools and: rna,tarUits ~ ". 3. To have students gain confidence in their (lbilityto teach simple' ta'sks

by example. ' , ,. .,

4. To encourage students to express themselves through 'c~aft activitie~ , and so help them to understand and encourage this form of expression in children.

: jJ::~t:udellts will be req,~ir'~d toc'qllect infor.mC1,tion about and complete

exerCrlSe$ in the~p!+owi~g:~c~~v'ities: '(~ _ 11'" ., '. n.:.

Ij. ',Bookcraft!s- 'Thissection of the-course is"clesigned to allow students to practise the skills and understand the processes. illvo~ved in the decoration and construction of a nUt!lber ofbo9k<;,;t;afts exerc,ise;s. '. ,The exercises and their order of presentation will be designed to include the following:

(a) All forms of paper decoration. (b)lvlarkingout,<cutting and pasting of strawboard of various weights,

bookcloth, cover papers and lining paper. . (c) Construction of spine and corners for cover .•. various types and

techniques. (d) Eyelets, press studs. cording. (e) Sewing single sections, multi-sections. (f) Construction of books from single leaves.

. I., \/.

Practical exercises will include the construction of a'Jot'ter, lviagazine Cover, Portfolio (foolscap), LposeLeaf Binder, Single SectionBo,ok~ Book from Single Lea.v~ls .. , "

Canew:ork -' This activity will consist of a sirnple introduct6ry' . exercise tofamilia'rise students with the material and the baSic technique~: ' involved in cane weaving. This will be followed by a more complex exerCise involving decorative weaving and stake control.

Weaving - Students will complete exercises: involving the use of paper and card looms as well as making a scarf on t,he braid and scarf loom.

Puppet.ry, .. · Students will be made aware of plastic alia' semi-plastic materiai;$$uitablefor,modelling. They will construct and do'~hea glove puppet. .: .,])1)'

Written assignmen·ts concerned with the classroom~appl'iC!:'i'tion and construction of practical assignments are to be submitted at various times during the year to coincide with the completiQii'6£ ptact1cal:exerci~'~~.

r .,' ,. , .' ',';;:: " " • ~ , r .

Text-Books: Depal'tmentof Education .... HandicraftLea£1ets;·"·.. . . Depa.rtment of Education - Curriculum forPHfua;ry Sth6rii~~'2"" t'!.

. ':;;! ".:-.. ,!~ .. -\ :}.~ 1.) r;"j"'; Crampton. C. : Canework.

Page 6: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- 4 ---

Refe rence Books:. Collins; 'A. F. : Bookcrafts for Junior Students. Collins, A. F. : Bookcrafts for Senior Students. Dryad Handicrafts, Leicester: Dryad Handicraft Instruction Leaflets. Crampton, C. : The Junior Basket lv-"aker Simpson and '.'leir : The V{eavers Craft, See also 745 in College Library.

Method of Assessment - Progressive Evaluation

EDUCA TION I : Educational Fsychology (Primary) a 4 hours per week .' •.... "",. , .... "' ,

This course provides an introduction to Psychology and its relation to Education. The basic aim of the course is to aid the development of a fuller understanding of human behaviour with reference to oneself and

: i'specifically to c1as~roOrh' situation's.' ,.,'

Each student will prepare Que major seminar and deliver it to the group (date indicated atcommenc~ment of course). Seven essays '(not exceeding 800 words) are required - due dates: 21st Iviarch, 16th lViay, 20th, June, 25th July, .8th August, 26th August, 10th Octbber.

Text-Books: Munn, N. L. Psychology: The Fundamentals of H'\lman Adjustment.

. 1 stEdition:. Boston, 'Houghton ~:H#lin Co.~. 1946. 2nd Edition. Boston', Houghton iVu ff lin Go. , 1951. }rd Edition. Boston, Houghton Mifflin': Co., 1956.

,'C' ··Reference 'Books: c, :,'SpeCifiC reference texts will be issu~d in asso~iation with each.

major topic of study. '

Method .of Assess,me,1ft - Progressive evaluation based on seminar work 'and assignments will be taken into account together with an annuai examination.

ENGLISH I : Communications 4 hours per week

Part (i) (a) : Drama l hour per week (1 cSemester}

Aiin:Expiression and Communication through Drama.. Large group, small group and individual expression. Emphasis on basic skills: relaxation, concentration, organic expression, 'intelligibility and var~ety o~l;iramaUc ~ov~:~ent.,Natural and Symbolic expression. Cultivat,ion of the in;tagination~), Correlation with<Music and Painting Activities: Mime and Movem~nt ,

~.,,~ ", (! .: .

':. '~.q _. :.

Voice and Gesture Improvi$ations Elementary dramatic mov'emEmt Ill,terpretative reading ,of, prose and verse passages Playr~ading:sc.ript analysis: dialogue and action integrated Student production of short extracts from plays.

1V1,ethQQ. of AssE1Ji,sment - Progres,sive,evaluation~'

Pa~t U) (b);Oral Expres~ion . 1 hour per week (1 Semester)

The major role ,of ~peed).in communication. The teacher"s professiqnal skills;, his leader~hipjnthecommunity. The value-of practice in developing speech and language skills,.:,:) :

Page 7: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

:.

--- 5 ---'

Theory of Speech: Voice Production andPe~~yery .. Faults .ofSpeech.

A c tivitie,~: .Di,$cu$~~()n, , "'.1: ., ·,P~~ti~:.,,·

"r';,

lvleeting Procedure~'i.ljJ.;·f'I;:J ;:'·3;("::; ..

Speech lVlaking. "."\' . i. .'" " .'.

General

Topics:

P~ip.cipl~~,; See Hne s, 1 ,'A,3 aboveJ .

Good Speech' a 't6tal 'fnteg'rateCl prC>ces's. Basic essentials of the (publict'si>eaking situation. Voi,ce colour. Voice production. Delivery. Speech: Faults and Defects'.

Activites: Reading aloud. , (Short) Sp~~bhinaking ~ Verse Speaking. Demonstrations and Visits.

Iv'lethod of Assessment Progressive evaluation.

Part (i) (c) : Reading t,! ;.'

, : j ~ ,

1 hour per week (1 Semester) -,") .. "

i:

Aims: To encourage greater awareness, of the imPor~~\';~:~~:i r~ading. T6"familiaris'e'\"'lth inno~ati6ns' in readIng materia.ls and equipment and provide opportunities for practice. To improve the readi~g efficiency of students. . . , .

(.: ''"j i"(

Content: (i) Discussidiir;'c5rihe place of ~eadin'g 'in cohufi~nication. (ii) Analysis of impediments to r.ea~in:,ge,ffici~ncy. ,.'

(iii) Investigation of'Cl.Il:cl,pra<:tiF~r.on',(~'~a.dit?-~, e~~ip.ment and materials (projected, mechanical and laboratory aip,s)., ',' nO, , .

(iv) Exercises on part~c;:ular reading skIlls - ,p~e-r~ading, scanning, skimming, critica.i';'~ading, inf';rri~g, ~~alua.ting, resisting.

(v) Finding inforri{~11btl, a.~d,J)reparing suitabl:e''riotes. '.. .; •• ' I ~ .- ' • ~. ' .. ' •••.• . .• ;: , :-, '-. ": .• : • : .... .:' ,.; : i :r ~J I) ; ': . .

'Practica,l'work as indiCate~iin':outline.

Method of Assessment - Class exercises.'~

Part (i) (d) : Written English 1 hour per week (l"Semester)

;; Cf.f.

;" i :) : ~ '. 'x .r i . '. ~.: ... ... '..'. ;

Purpose of cours~',as person~~~a.nd professionald~veloptn~riL Teacher a,~ cHizend~:v\e1oping .awaz:en(ess of social proces:ses and' sbcial pre'ssures, ten~ion bet;W:een dec1a~Jd and actual values."' (;. .

Environment as part of the educational proces's:' the· mass media'­newspapers, radio, film, television, books, music, plastic arts, :0:,.: institutions. . .

Vvriting: story,articre, sketch, essay,' ve;J;~e,~,dl"ar:n,a ,(sc~~pt); debate; report, memorandum, minute's', letter, fo.r~s; ·sp,~ec;p.Jp!tr,~ducing, thanking a speake r. '. . '.' .

·'o.,r}J:,'c:.u;·.,l·· "

Practical work - practical application of Coul":s,e·':)r11 ;~! (.~'nr:,' "'''i:'

Assignments and Essays ~ preparation.a~ req,",i;t;~d .tQr ,~rticipa~ion,.: in activitle's2'::' ;;i:").~~.z~: . . 1 /'~.(: .~: r: . :' . . .~·, . .l .. ,o . '~'. ,. .

,,; .t 0 J: l~' i, 1', : ~) ~' .", . :. . ':

Method of Assessr:p.ent ,.. Progressive evaluation,';

Page 8: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

-----------

- -,.. ... 6 . - -,..

Part (ii) : Growthoi Literature. I hour per week

The course aims to outline the evolution of English Literature, to diversify the reading interests of students and to examine the different media by which modern technology presents literature.

Topics include Beowulf and Chaucer; the rise of drama; the rise of the novel; review of literature by centuries and "periods";' some characteristics of modern literature; sOme implications, of the presentation of literature via radio, films~stage and t~lE;vision.

',: .. 1'" ,.:. . . ',' ,

Practical work - Students are expected to take advantage of local presentation of films, plays, etc.

Assignments and Essays - One ess~y, 1500-2000 words due in July. Class exercises. Optional seminar. . '. . . . .

,'; .

Method of Assessment - Essay; fi~~~riE5~a~ip.ati~~;( :seminar.

Part (iii) : ,!.;:.'.) ,.,;'

Method . (a) English Method in 'the Primary 'Scho~l

. ,(b)!E:nglish Method in the Infante'Sen-dol' ;-,( ..

English Method in the Primary School: ' . . ,jh' . .. :, ('.

1. Introduction: (a) Course orientation.. . .. ..... '."J:

. (b'): fT'he! contititiiti'g'~ifripprtance of la.ngua,g~ teac,hing .~~ i~modern ;'''' ; (,' :1. so;cl~ty ~ ;'1' ,.' • .... ,

2.

3.

4.

:'f~;.'~": -!. ,'''' , '~J.I;·· .~,'.!

The Teaching of Spelling:" .. ', (a) Spelling as an important skill - a.teaci"J1lIap1>,r..Q4:Fh.; (b) Selecting appropriate material. . ..... ,,,' " .i. I. :' ,;,,;.!' ;. :

(c) Types of spellingles'sons. . ..... ,'() [, I, ,< 'ii,

;,'. , (d'JThelmpor'tance"o!'the pretest m~thQd. i; .,. ..

(e) Spelling readiness .. " (,' . ',·,;:'(f) Organizing the week's work in s~el1irig~

The

The

" ~ ~:. ~..: .

Teaching 9£ Handw%liting: (a) An introduction to the styles recommended jn the .. curJ'iculum. (b) General teaching rec~rrimendations. .. . (c) Teaching a new. letter or join.

Teaching of Reading: (a) The aims and objectives.

~: ',r ,;).~ "

(b) Types of reading lessons. , . \ .

«(:).U~i;tp.g·.;tlle 'School Ma:g~lZine ito I advanta ge . . :.; ! .(d}.T~h'i.~physiolo)gy of;r;eading'.~"(Eye span, movement, regres"sirln, etc.)

(e) Developing.and.str.e'ngthenin;gcomprehension skills. ,; , .... \

5 •... Oral an4W·r;itt~n Expr.ession:· (a) 4 im~ ~n(il,. obj e cti ve s. \' . ":, "

(b) Dramatic and expository situations in expression. . (c) Develop~ng a topic f()r ora~a~d written. expression •

; (\0 (dft·:re>atiri'g' a'n 'expo s'itc)ry topiC;'~. .. '." . ",' . .... ~. : .. 'fer Topic 'J s'el~ ction·· througho'u t 'the' grade s .

• r • t"":

. -"" .. ,"

(f) Evaluation of written expreSSion.

English Method in the' IMane s;~h~oi:' ' " !

. . " . .,", . _";,..... " ... ~ . ,-,r ~; 'f ,(.".": ,~,)~. ,. -' .. .

1. . Airnsoithe teachrri:gof' English 'in the Infant School. Experience in the use of English of the Infant School child -

(a) Ability to. use language tocomm.unicate. (b) Ability to use the sentence form. (c) The morning talk lesson.

~7 "

Page 9: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

7.

(d) The comprehension and use of language forms - introduction of , ;(- \ ~o,rx~ctforms .andthechild~s reproductionofthe'se. ",0

2. Development of oral embellishments. Broadening of imq.ginative fields:'in' oral 'work. Picture Talk lessons. The conversational exchange of ideas - the Crea,.tive Play lesson - work with individual~ and small. group~.

• ~. f " , .;. .; .. :, .:.' ': .. ~ . , ,: ',: ' . . .'. :- . : . , .

3. Dramatization - formal and creative. " (a) The content of material.to bErdramatized'~ (b)"Th~'use'.of·impr,omptu andcreiative drama.' The relation of

content to the English .pro,gratnme ,., parti~ularly in the illustration ..... 6£ di:£ficulr.ofd"u$a.ges .. ' '.' .' '. .,.'.. . '

(c) The use of puppetry. ' ' " . " . .' ,

4. Reading - the Pre-Reading Stage. (a) Left-right eye movement. (b) Visual discrimination. (c) Auditory discrimination. (d) Exercises in the association of written material with conceRts

repre-sented.: ,~_ L', _~ :,: ~ , ' ','. '.". ',::. "

(e) Development of a sense of sequence through use of pictures.

5. The'Be,gihriiri'g Reading' Sta.g~·~ .,: ( : J '.' '~

The Look-Say approach. (a) Word recognition. (b) Phrase recognition.

;·.i ,:"',

(c) Sentence recognition. '" .' The use of simple}idire~e.'ea:s-ily 'utlderst06a words. Use of contrast in visual q~~,i,ty.!, '. '~, i'

• ,'j :o'

The value ofjthe use of print similar to that used ,in.wri,ting~ ' . . ,,: •. ,,~ .. ~~ .. ,,; .... ";,!: .. "':'i t " "\1!"\ ~:', ;)', .1 .... ", .,"

The Analytic ~,pp~oa.cp. ':'t;U ~e qfpbontc Ik. ; ;,', ',.

" ' . .r'; . (a) Tpe~~~ch~ng, of.th,~, -ba.~ic'sounds.;' (b) The breaking down J>t @. .\VoX'td:. '.' :," (c) The building up of a word. (d) The ,us!f!:P:;~ cqnt~xt\i!;a.l~l).Q. auditory clues;

The complementary qualities of th'e_seapprbc:lche~.:',' i 4 • I:, .. U ,", 1 .. : : ;.; ; :: ~i .:<.i : ' './

6. Phonic Training. (a) Diagraphs. (b) Word Building. (c) Word Grouping.

7. Spelling.

.,":','

... , . ~

fl ".'

:J' "

::; .

r ,:,

l,n~r9~"ctt.oni'-' t~El;~,cc:urat~ .rep~oducti;on of a . ,simple pattern: ",'the. n;._oiE'phQ;~o gy of. :wor_~${ ..] . . ," , , .' ,

t ,;;. \ .'...... .' , .. :, " ',- , "

Syste~a,~~~~g ,~,Qwle4ge, gain~d,'t:tltoughtheuse of phonics •. The use of Spelling Games.

8. H~~~w::r,i~ip,g. '. ,.'."" 'i De~elo~~~g ha'~cfw;~itil\lg, ,readin~ss. ,)'ll~~. ;,,~e -~ri,tiqg~9p.r,se~ ,...' I ' "

'Transition to f0:J:'.J(Ua~ s,cript wrHiq,g." Rhythmic pattern work as an aid to fluency.

;., ;', ... i.· , " .. :.!.~" , \ ' f!) i . }> \ \ i ' f..:':'

.:,

',.-):\ ..

Practical work - seven demonstrations (3 Infant, 4 Primary) on which brief aSSignments will be set.

ASSignments and Essays _ 'i' '.I ,.;", .1' ":;' ,

1. Note taking from curriculum with additions from reference: m8.terial.

, '.

About lOOOwords. Du~.,~:pril/or l)fLaY. 'i' ,,' i,; h, ,.!'i ·.ii.C : ;::'

\:

2. Practical assignment based on Infant 1r.;.ethod plus analysis andcommeht - ' approx. 1000 words.. Due July. ;, 'i

Page 10: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

8

i ..

3. 'Essay onre,~e~:r;c~ top;c:.;AQout 1000 words. ,Due September/October.

Text Books: Cole, Luella: The ~lementary School Subjects. Schonell, F. : The Teaching of Reading.

Refe'l'ence B~ok~: Anderson, P. S. : Language Skills in Elementary Education. Gregg, J. : Beginning the Three R's. Hildreth, G. : 'l;'eaching Spelling. Schonell, F. S., .: The ,Psychology and Teaching of Reading.

M.ethod of Assessment - P:rogi'essive evaluation (aSSignment and demonstration work). Written examination~

HEALTH EDUCATION I 1 hour per week

Not offered in 1969.

1vLATHEWlATICSI: '1VIatliematics Meth~dfor the F;rimary ancl Infant Teacher 2 hours per week

, "

1. Lesson structure and the preparation of less~m notes for ,primary a,pd infant classes.

2. Questioning - particularly oral questioning. 3. Tests.

Cuisenaire Method. ; :"i :,~ ,

4. 5. Number concept (Piaget's ideas), set, base ar~thmetic.

"'f' '"I" I' ,

A study of the curriculum, its methods and aims. '

6. Introducing the b3:s1c concepts of the '~pera.tions + - ~' x ~ '~ , 7. Motivation of mathematics lessons. 'Aims of the syllabus.' / 8. Algorisms, extended forms and stages in reaching the contracted 'form. 9. Fun methods for drill. Number patterns etc. ' 10. The fraction concept. 11. Operations with rational number. Decimals, percentages. 12. Measures (weight, length, time, etc.) " , ", 13. Practical lessons - dividirig a "class i~to groups. 14. Problems. 15. Shapes (geometry) and Area. 16. Graphs. 17. Programming. 18. History of number and measures.

Assignments and Es'says - Six minor assignments, set one weekin advance, each involving one foolscap page of work. Dates due: 11th JUly,' 25th July, 8th August, 12th September, 26th September; 10th October. "",

Text Books: N. S. W. Department of Education Mathematics, Curriculum'ifo:r';

. Primary Schools ,'19'67. Downes, L. & Paling, D. : The Teaching of Arithmetic iriPrimary

Schools, Oxford, 1958~

N.lethod of Assessment ';'Final exa~ination, aSSignments and class tests..!",

MUSIC I : MUSic in the Primary School 2 hours per week

"'.; ;

Vocal: Repertoire suited to Infant and Erimary classes. Aural training. Reading and Writing.

: ,

Page 11: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

9

In:strumental: Recorder tuition. Listening: Instruments of the orchestra; singing void~ and its range; ana~ysi~,ofvoc~l and instrum~ntal compositions suitable for lessons in

.~ .. lii£~nt aiid'flrip?-~ryc1asses. ' '.' -M~thodj.ndtec4niques: ~inging a~d listening. activities in music lessons.

': .',~:' .' I. :., ,.',. '. .

Assignments and Essays -1. Essay. 1000 words, due 20th June, 1969, (Sections 101-105) R. Heading. 2. Collection of songsand.listening material, approx. 8 hours' work, due

17th October', 1969 (Section 100) J. Ferguson.

Text Books: A. B. C. : Adventures in Music. Priestley and Fowler: Recorder Book I.

Reference Books: Eele : Listening Together. Fiske : 'Listening to Music

. A~so CollegeJ .. ibrary780-789.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation, through regular written and practical tests, and assignments.

PHYSICALEDUCA TION I : Primary PhYSical Education I hour per week

1. Aims and scope of .Physic~l Education in the Primary school. 2. Consideration of nature of school child in relation to physical activity. 3. Organization, administration and supervision of Games Lessons.

Methods of class coaching and development of personal skills. Knowledge of rules of certain major games.

4. Appreciation of good poise and good posture in movement and methods by which it may be developed in a child.

S. Swimming and Life Saving. 6. Elementary Body Mechanics.

Text Book; MacCuaig .and Clark: Game.s Worth Playing.

Reference Books: Department of Education N. S.W. : Primary Syllabus of Physical

'. Education. Davies, M. B. : Phy~ical Training, Athletics and Games •

. Method of Assessment - Unit Tests.

SCIENCE I : Natural Science Method .' 2 hours per we.ek

The purpose of the course is to help students understand the role of science in the primary school and the type of science experience which may profitably be provided at this level.

A detailed study will b:~.made of the Curriculum for Natural Science for primary schools. Topics discussed in relation to this will include: '.

Concept development. Selecting suitable activities. Methods of presentation. Adapting content to the child's interests and abilities. Recording. Developing an understanding of the methods of sciertce. Dev~loping an appreciation of the con~ributioll of science to man's welfare. Developing 2. science programme.

Page 12: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

10

Extending interest in science beyond the classroom; projects,out­door, p.ctivities. library facilities, etc.

: •• 1 .', • "

'Assignments and Essays - One rriajorwritJen.a.S~igninent'(app'rox. 12.00 words) due towards the end of each term plus certain practical exercises e • ,g.Seiectionand pre sentation ~{ expet-'ltnenfs and irl:a't~rials' suitable for Primary classes.

Text'Book: ' , Curriculum forPrimarySch:ools -' NatUral Scie~ce.

Reference Books: Blough and Swartz : Elementary School Science. Burnett: Teaching Science in the Elementary School. ' Craig: Science for the Elementary Se'hoo! Teacher. Hone, Joseph and Victor: A Source Book for Elementary Science.

Method of Assessment - Assignments, exercis~$~nd examination.

SOCIAL SCIENCE I : Social Studies in the' Infanta.ndPrimary sChool 2. hours pe~ week

The course will consist of two strand's'-

A. Social Studies Methqd which deals with"the teaching of Social Studies in the Infant and Primary Schools. Topics will include ,

Aims arid Purposes -'WhatSocial Studies ,Means. Content 'of Social Studie's course. Factors influencing types of lessons. LesSori. types. Current affairs. Scripture andmOl'al educatIon. Celebration of Special Days. 4V1apping. Local Studies.

, .' B. A course based on parts of the Syllabus in Social Studies' for 'the Primary

School. In this course the emphaSis wiil be on te~hriiques of~btaining information and interpretation rather than on qO,ntent. ,Lec~~es, and discussion techniques will be used initially but as the year progresses greater emphasiS will be placed on student research.

Assignments and Essays - Up to six short reports on research, each about 500 words spaced throughout the year or one maj or report.

Text Books: Primary School Curriculum. Dunlop: Teaching Social Studies in the Primary School.

Method of Assessmetit - Progressi've' eva.luation.

PART I 0 YEAR I Option Subjects for Primary and Infant Courses.

ART I 0 : Practical Art. 2. hours per week

To give practic;:al ~xperience in Drawing and P~,intingand 3D work. This course is 'designed to improve the standard of the student's own art ability and wi~lincludeappreciCl.tion and theo,ry. ',','

Assignments arid Essays - Set works to be completed, du;ring the year in Drawing, Painting, and 3 D work. Approx. 3 works'per term.

Page 13: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

11

Text and Reference Books: i' No settext or reference book~ but time will be allowe.dfor. special

library study.

lv.l.ethod of Assessment - Assignments during the year .. . , .:

CRAFT I 0 ': Extension of Prllllary Crafts . ,.-. 2 h~tirs pe'r week . .

This course is an extension of the "General Primary Course". (p.3) The approach is to be practical.

J:;>rojec,ts will be, ~elected from the following: lino printing, leatRer­work, bookbinding, "fIood.toys, ceramics, art, metalwork.

Practical Work - Lino block, key case,' single section book, multi-section book, photograph album, clowti, coil pot (ceramics), enamelled pendant or cuff-links. . ".

ASSignments and Essays - Notes to be prepared on. each· project. These notes to be in the form of work sheets suitable for display in the classr6om. "

Text Books: As for "Primary Craft" (p.3)

.": .:. ",1 .': .. : . Ii;' '-'

Reference Books: Moseley, Johnsori,K6e:dg' " Craft's Design •

. ,', ".

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

EDUCATION I Oa: Clinical Education 2 hours pe r week

It .is int,ended to introduce .the student to the clinical method for dealing with primary and infant school children who display atypical behaviour. Methods used in diagnosing' such difficulties as well as general treatment procedures will be covered. Some specific problems commonly occurring in the prim~p~y school will, be discus,sed~ S\lch difficulties will be studied under the three headings:

(a) Atypical behaviour due to organic disability; (b) Atypical behaviour concerned with disabilities in specific school '" ; subjects;' ',' . (c) Atypical behaviour ariSing from emotional difficulties.

ASSignments and Essays -1. Reporting on an interesting child - 500 words - due first week .Term II. 2. Essay - lOOO words - due third week Term II. 3. Essay - 2000 words - due last wee.k Term II..l

Reference Books: To be given as need arises.

Method of Assessment - P:rogressive assessmen,t on assignment work ••

Ob : Exc eptional Children

This course will deal with the nature of atypic.al children and of the provisions for their education with emphasis on the N. S. W. scene. Visits to special schools and classes will supplement work done in s.eminars and lectures.

.) ;'" 'r

P~·aqt~~f!.l Work ,~, Observatio~ of special schools and classes.

ASSignment's 'and Essays - One' major seminar paper; record of observation of special schools and classes~ . " ,

Page 14: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

12

Text Books: :N. S. W. Department of Education publication: Provision for the

Education of Exceptional Children.

Refe renee Books: As given in connection with sen:inars on specific topics.

; . ; .. , -.. J ','

lvlethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation of seminars and observation records. together with terlTI tests.

Oc : Psycholo gy

,l: ,:This course is intended to cover substantially those areas dealt with in Psychology I at university level. Topics of study will include:

Physiological base,s of behaviour., Neurological' founda'tions of behaviour. Growth and development. Sensation and perception. Learning.

Assignments and Essays - One major seminar topic (2000 words) to be delivered to the group. Due 11 th July, 1969.

Reference Books: Lists of references will be issued' as appropriate during the cour see

:rv~ethod of Assessment - Student progress will be evaluated by seminar work and a class test at the end of the course.

ENGLISH I Oa : Drama 2 hours per week

A course in practical drama. emphasizing acting and experience of drama and the theatre. Details of course will be given in lectures.

PractiCal work - Participation in a one-act play and/or in dance drama.

ASSignments and Essays - Two assignments of 500 words. one on a design for a modern play, the other on script analysis.

Reference Books: Department of Education N. S. ~,,,/. : Speech Education: A Handbook

.' . for Secondary Teachers. Dyc'e:Speech and Drama in the Secondary School. Burton: Drama in the School. Bennett ': Cla'ssroom Dramatics. Bennett: Let's Do a Play. Burton! English through Self-ExpreSSion. Bruford : Teaching Mime. Cobby : Calling All Playmakers. Siks : Creative Dramatics. iWay:Develop1'l1ent through Drama. The College has a number of movie and strip films relevant to the course.

Method of Assessment - By practical work, assignments and a short examination paper.

Ob : Literature

A survey of contemporary British and American Literature, embracing poetry I prose and drama. A flexible course in which the student will be encouraged to pursue his own special interests but in which there will be tutorialS and class exercises to achieve some, breadth •. of coverage.

Page 15: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

13, ---"

Practical work - regular intensive reading,'" .

:.,' i ·"A$sigirih~nt$ aiid'Es'says':'One' shb~t~dtial e~say in:.!tlle ,~tudent' s own fie:d of specialisation will be required at the ,ell(i,o! September. As well, there will be seminars and class"e~~~ci.~~,~thro~.·ghop.i,the ye~r on specific topics. (Approx. 5000 words» ., i..' \", . . .

Method of Assessment. - Classexercis,eS~ffemj.n;,LrS, one substantial ., : ;.i. -f; ,I." ;i...... ". .,!":' .' .. '. ,\. . . '.' ,

essay. "; •• r",

LANGUAGES I Oa = Elementary German:,".·" 2 hour,~, perwee.~:,. ;,')""'.' . '; ,',,-,

This is a course de;3igne<dfor/,those students whb: have no't' studied German previously. The chief aim of the course will be to give students an opportunity of lea+ning to c?mp'!:~,j:~::~~~~:s,pea~:.:.berman. Students will also be e~couraged t? ga~;n:, 'fa'cili~y fnr~~4!,~,~,J~e}?:~~uag~'\;j :);'l.'''

During the courae aspects of Germail1if~";aitd)i(:ultUre will be s'tudied. Students' particular interests will be con~.id~r_ed,Jn~~.~ pl~nni.ng of tN-s course.

~ ."...: . " ", ,'.

TextBooks: .':", '" ",' .,.",.: .,'

Leopold, K. : Int+od~tihg: G'ednan:,'CA&',it)., . ) .j, : , ; "I ': .I'.' , ~ .. ;, '., ~ . '."., I

. , ..:.: , I

Method of Assessment - Progressive evalu~tio~~ . . ,\ ~.} . ,

Ob : Latin • r:": ~) ; .' ~ I .,:: .,.' : " " :: '~ J .

"

, -.-;. "" .~,--.,.; ,i, ,' .• • " !

The cour~e isdes~gned\forthose ,who·ha'Ve: stud~ed'\Latiri to School Certificate or Higher School Certificate.

'.' ~. :~, , ' ".\~' \., , \ . . : . ~ .' : _', l .

The aim is to achieve fluency in comprehending the language both ora~ly and, by reading.T;o;thi~en;d:Ls.!ll'l1:P'!e.'y'~rs.:.~:~hd prose:: passages 'for reading and dis'cussionwilliead on to a study of several serious works in prose and verse. ;,

:. '~ <I '\ :' 1 •

.... ~ _Assignments and Essays ... weeklylplreparation of·matertal set.

:;'.' Te':ki; 'Books: (list to''i;e stippri~d)"!' . i

. ': r;'Me'th6d 'of Assessm~nt - pi6~ressive evaluation .. ,

MUSIC I 0 : Elementary Harmony, . H~sto;t'y and App;t'e,ciation '.i'

l hours per week ' ... ,I,' . . ,

1. Elementary Harmony for use in the class room. 2. General Iv.£usical History. 3. Analysis of larger Musical Forms.

Assignments and Essays - V:'eekly harmony exercises (~ hour). Fortnightly preparation of notes on work covered in lectures (Ya hour).

Text Books: Colles : The Growth of Music.

Refe renc e Books: Hill, Ralph: The Symphony. Hill, Ralph: The Concerto. MUSic Library 780-789.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION lOa 2 hours per week

Physical Tests and Ivieasurernents

This subject is intended for Men Students only and will extend the work of the General Primary Student in the following fields:

Page 16: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

----- ----------------

14

1. Tests and Me~surelnents. 2. Display Work, stressing rhythmic creative activities uSing balls,

'hoops;: etc. '; , ,... "

3." PUre' iOymria~H¢ s., , 4". Adva:ri~ed '~drk'in'.A.i'chery and Fenc,ing.

~ i ' .. -, :

Text Books: . ;,;i:, MacCuai'garid Clark':ca.mes ""forth Playing.

Reference Books: Le Maistre : Physical Education. . McCloy, C.H. : Tests and Measurements in Physical Education.

},\1et~od.ofAss.essment, ":' Unit: work tests. ',:

This subject if for Wom~n Students only 'and is intended to e~tend the~~ ,~owledge in the fo1l9wing fields:

!, '

" .

1. Tests ahdMeasurements. 2 .• Phys~caIFitne~s Development at varying levels .. 3. Displays, including dance choreography. 4. Dancing - Ivj.odernDance Expressi9n •.

Dances for the Primary Child.

Reference Books:; '.i J .

;."

Le Maistre : Physical Education. McCloy, C.H. : Tests and Measurements itiPhysieal Education .

. Murx:ay, ~uth)~. :·Dance in Elementary Education.'

Method of Assessments - Unit work tests.

SOCIAL SCIENCE I 0 :. An Extension of the Primary SocialSci~mce; I (p.1'O) Z hours per ~eek

This subject offers a number of studies involving individual reading and research un9~r guidance of a tutor: in such fields as archaeology; ASian, American and Ancient History; meteorology; urban Geography and Economics •

. , ., " : . ,

topics. Assignments and Essays - Regular repor.t~_ on individual research

.(,~ '. • • • " .' ~l -:' • . • ' "

Method of As,s.essment:;;. Pr~gressivee';'aluation.·

'. " . . l .. : . "!. i (-: .

, "'; ..

f.

Page 17: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- ·15·.·---

1- {j

ARTiI;j(, .E;,d~cCltion.:.c:p.1jo,ugh; Art .' . ':" 2 hours per week

~ ')

Child development in Art during Infant and Primary stages.' Class room management for teaching Art:lv.i.at.erials,. Pro:grammes, etc. Practical work to d~v..~1.op tile student,! s own ability in Art. Teaching methods and: a.in;1s. Study of the primary sc:llool <:urriculum. A short history of Art development.

Practical methods - Drawing P~intiJ,.·g

Cre~t~ve cr,a{ts,;. 3 Dimensioqal w-ork ' Design

~~."~lr,;,-.:":' 'i·.::~: .... ;5·~ ".,.l ••.. .1: .. :

, ~:

Assignments and Essays - Written programme for teaching Art in the primary school- 3rd term (Progress,ive.leiS,$oos fo.'r :()~~. termL<0&.jbr' .. ·.·> A rt work or study (one major 'piece-of woik:co~pieted .dul-ing2nd ·te'J:'tfir ..... Demonstration notes - 1 first term, 1 second term, .1 thirci ~~rIA'

~. :", . ..". ;"\ ;;. \ '. ,;,. ,,<; \' I ' •• ,'; ' •• ) .. 1 . " ,: ':, < ;.. ,L": .:. -. .: . ';' " , • ~.' \.;,. '., " ., '"

Reference Books: ~ , '. ',.. ","'; .. ' < ~ : ••

Eisner, E. W. & Baker, D~ W. :R.eadin~~in ,l\rt Ed~c;:ati.orh . Kepes', Gyorgy:LangUage of' Vision. , . ... .. J... " '.

• ~' : t , i : , ,: :Lowerifield>& Brittain :Crea:t:i\1e.·a,~;d:)\i.le.htal' Gro~th~ :.: .) R-ead~ Herbert': Edudition thro'tigh' Art'. , '.' '.' '1 ; "'" \.~ i '

Method of Assessment - Lecture notes (complete ;r~.~prd of methods). I Progress during the year (practical work)~ A~s,ignn:lents .. · Wri~t'~~ examin-

• ,_. ",. I , ~. : ' • ; I" \ ' . • ~'.J "I. , :. ,.

atlon on methods ·and 'theory. . .. '.' .

CRAF.r .1l,i,;.PrimaryCraits.,Iv,Lethod ;,~, ;;\:!, "!:':.' i'

1 hour per week

1, I',

l,"'J".!

.. ' :J:bes~co~d y~~~ 9i theprima.J;Y: cJ;ait, course ',is designed· to reinforce techniques intJ;'~ducedin.FirstY,ear.and·continuesto introdtice;·hew~and va.rh~d;: ...

;. . ... '.,.' . .

activities. An increaSing emphasis will be placed upon application to' the \ classroom situation. Part of the course is designed to present ideas and activities suitable forlrP~:erPrimaJ;ya,p. d Infant Cla~:S~.~,~:'

.... -. ~ ... ~ .. ' .. ' . ~ . -' - . .. .. "'. ". ."

1. Infant Handwork (a). ~a~~~S~~l I)e.y~lop~ent - cutting, pasting.; .' ~,." .. (b)A,ppl~~dPCi.p~r ,$}tills.~ cpt paper. design'S, pattern cutting, '~frie2;e: ), .. ";

cutting and deSign, Christmas and Easter cards, festive ·dec'6rations. {c} Creative Activ~ty Lessons -preparationand .presentationof

.. "individual :atid' groupacti~ity: ·le~s6il~'.; ," ", ... ,;. "." ~ .:.' ." ":

2. Lower Primary'" : <.' :' ,; .' :.;,:. ,.; : :.' .' . :.:' ';" c." :'. '

,', " \ •• ' ".1 -,. ,,{\ . ,I , ,"

(a) Extension of elementary paper skills~" (b) Two and three dimensional modelling in light cardboind •.. . .

3. Uppe·:t·Priniar·y ,." ,.!",:.,' '". ;, ..• '. '. i, ": : • t.:' , . J' •.

(a) Lino Block Cutting and Printing~ SUk Screen Printing. (b) Single Section and Single Leaf Binding. .', :.,,' . ',,! .' ,)'1'"

. , . , .' . :' , '. ~ ; :-:, it; '!,' \ .-. " ," 4. Impr6vfst;d:Cra£( . ,....... '. . ..... . . ...

:;'The preparation: and prese~tatiori ofa,c't,i'iv'ity)essons which mak~ use of items children collect around the' home - egg cartons, match boxes, scraps of wool, bottle-tops, etc.

5. Teaching Aids Instruction in the application .~f duplic~ting and projection ~ids ..

Page 18: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

16

Assignments and Essays - Written assignments concerned with the classroom application and construction of practical assignments are to be submitted at various times during the year to coincide with the completion of practical exercises.

T ext Books: ' Crampton, C. Canework. Collins. A. F. Bookcrafts for Senior Students. Department of Education: Handicraft Leaflets. Department of Education: Primary Syllabus.

Reference Books: Grate r. IvJ:. : ~v'la.ke it in Pape r. Becker: Adventures with Scissors and Paper. Collins, A. P. : Bookcrafts for Juniors. Also 745 in College Library.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

EDUCATION, .II :. Part (i) : Educational Psychology 4 hours per week 2 hours per week

This course consists of selected 'topics from the fields of Educational Development and Social Psychology.

Assignments CLnd Essays - Students will be reqU:ired to complete six 500 word assignments during the yea~. (Due 21st March, 3rd ApJ;"il, 18th June, 27th Juhe, 11th July, 19th September). A ~500 word essay will be required for 25th July.

Text Books: Connell, W. F., et al The Foundations of Education.

Reference Books: Duplicated sheets listing suggested references wiUbe issued during

the year.

Method of aSSessment will be progressive based on assignment marks and term te$ts. Students are'required to pass 'both in assignments and in term tests.

Part (ii) : Modern Educational Practice 2 hours per week

This course examines various topics in Educational Philosophy. administration, organisation, classroom management and pedagogical techniques.

Practic'al work- Seminars and large group/sm~ll,group discussions.

Assignments and Essays - Vveekly assignments (exercises) : approximately one foolscap page.

T e.xt Books: Connell, W. F .• et al : Foundations of Education, Sydney Novak,

"\,i 1962.

Reference Books: Barcan, A. : A Short History of Education in New .South Wales. Knight, .E. VI. : Twenty Centuries of Education, Boston: Gunn &

, Co~, 1940.

l\iethod of Assessment -By weekly aSSignments; By frequent class tests; By performance insman'group discussions.

Page 19: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

17

ENGLISH n 4 hours per week

Part (i) (a) : Children's Literature 1 hour per week (1 Semester)

1. A consideration of children's literature as representative of the moral and soCia;Fva1ues of a society. '

2. Analysis of the content of stories to present their relationship to the present day as instruments of communicating the values of a contemporary culture. " .

(a) a cautionary tale , (b) a nonsense story

(c) a realistic story.

3. Emergence and use of the following - myths fables folk tales legencl s fairy tales.

4. The criteria of a good children's book.

5. History and development of Children's Books. The use of books written for adults as vehicles of moral instruction -Foxe's BOOK,OF MARTYRS. T~~children's.,approp~.iation of books written for adults, e. g. 'Robinson Crusoe' and 'Gulliver's Travels'because of

(a) basically good stories . , (b) episodic plot structures.

~0 ' ' " , ,,'

6. T~~.dfJv~lopment of didacticism in material written for children.

7. The recording of folk tales - a comparatively late literary phenomenon -The Brothers Grimm.

8. The development of the literary folk and fairy tales at a time when society becomes both urban and industrial - Hans Christian Anderson.

9. The development of the incorporation,of moral content into al'l artistic whole. e. g. Kingsley's THE WATER BABIES. The use of symbolism in characterization.

10. The development of children's literature as a form aimed directly at children's enjoyment -Thenonsense story which mocks adult ~lues - Car~ollts ALICE IN WONDERLAND.' ' '

11. Boy' s adv~nture stories - R.M. Ballantyne CORAL ISLAND -relevance to modern literature. - Golding's LORD OF THE FLIES.

12. The children's story written with author-child identification - e. g. E. Nesbitt's THE TREASURE SEEKERS.

13. The recent developments of y'ualities of fantasy in children's literature -THE HOBBIT- J. R. R. Tolkien - leading on to adult mate'rial - THE LORD OF THE RINGS, " , THE BORROWERS - Mary Norton The NARNIA series - C. S. LewiS - use ci. syt:rlbolism.

14. AUSTRALIAN WRI~ING FOR CHILDREN The bush stories - DOT AND THE KANGAROO The growing rec,o gnition of the worth of aboriginal myths - CHILDREN OF THE DARK PEOPLE - F .D. Davison.

Page 20: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

18 -"--

Fantasy - Norman Lindsay - THE MAGIC PUDDING A bush fantasy with lilliputian qualities - SNUGGLEPOT AND' CUDDLEPIE - May Gibbs. , The post-war emergence of an indigenous Australian children's literature. Prize material.

Assignments and Essays - Critical essay or practical creative writing for children - 1200 words - due July.

T ext Books: . Arbuthnot, Iv:,.H. : Children and Soaks. Scott Foresman &: C.o.,

Chicago. .. '. l\ieigs, C. : A Critical History of Children's Literature. Iviacmillan,

New York, 1953. . . Smith, J. S. : A Critical Approach to Childl"en's Literature. McGraw

Hill Book Co., 1967.

Reference Books: Hazard, P. : Books, Children and Men (Trans) Horn Book Inc.,

Boston, 1960. V{hite, D. : About Books for Children. N. Z. Library Association.

Part (i) (b) : Literature - Drama and .Poetry 1 hour per week .' '.' .. ..

: : ':~ A. Drama: A brief outline of English drama, from the Middle Ages to

mode rp. time s. with !p.tensi ve reading of selected plays iIi the conte~t~f thei:!.' period.. . .' ..

B. Poetry: Study of a number and variety of poeins"todeve1oP\lndE1r~ standing and discrimination. Techniques a~d so'me forms of

. pp~try 'rill be .considered.· particular attention will be given to influential modeTn Australian poets •

.' ':.'

. Assignments and Essays - Two essay assignments; 1000 words length, due in second and third terms.

. . .

. Tex;t Books: Evans: Short History of English Drama. Sheridan: The Rivals .

. Wilde: The :Importance o'fBeing Earne'st. Synge : Riders to theS~a. . '. Thomas: Under Milk Wood. ;Hayward.: P~nguin,l,3ook of English Verse.

Reference Books: To be given in lectures but students may consult the College

Library at 791.5,792,808.2,822-822.9 (drama). and 808.1,820.7, 821 (poetry).

Method of Assessment - A sSlgnments and final examination.

Part (i) (c) : Literature - .Modern Novel and Short Story" . 1 hour p~r week

): I

The course. aims .to improve the capacity of students'to profit from an important educational activity and to develop the literary ahilities that the teaching of literature requires.

The texts to be studied will be the fo1l6wi~g;" Stow, Randolph: The Merry- go-round iri' the ,Sea. White, Patrick: The.T:ree ofl\t~an. ColiJ;l: RodeJ:ick, ed •. ,: l1enryLawson· : Twenty Stories. Steinbeck, John: The Grapes o~ Wrath. Cary, Joyce: Except the Lord.

Page 21: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

19

Bowen, Elizabeth: The Death of the Heart. Hadfield, John, ed. ': lviodern Short Stories.

Assignments will be based mainly on set texts. Students wishing to e~ten:d the saope of,the literature they study may present a seminar, answer a question in the final examination on an author in whom they have a special interest, and use their wider reading to attempt a general question on modern fiction. Thus students may com~into contact with other twentieth-century authors such as Graham Greene, Somerset l\~i.augham, Alan Sillitoe, Evelyn Waugh, Joseph Conrad, Henry Green, Ivr,Compton-Burnett, Virginia Woolf, Iris Iv.!.urdoch, D. H. Lawrence, E.l\-.;'. Forster, John Braine, Lawrence, Durrell, John ',:rain, L. P. Hartley, Jan'ies'Joyce, Aldous Huxley, George Orwell, Kingsley Amis, Muriel Spark, William Golding" Saul Bellow~, Ernest Hemingway, Joseph Heller, Stephen Crane, Bernard lvlalamud, F. Scott Fitzgerald, Theodore'Dreiser, vViUiam Styron,' John Updike, Henry James, Thornton "'{ilder, Sinclair Lewis,Willia,mFa'\l~kner, Martin Boyd, M. Barnard Eldershaw, Leonard 1vIann, Judah Waten, Vance Palmer, Eleanore Dark, Thea, Astley,' Gavin Casey, Miles Franklin~ HenryHandel Richardson, Peter Cowan, KatherirePrichal,"d."XavierHerbert, Louis Stone, Kenneth 1vIackenzie, Thomas Keneally, Kylie Tennant, David 1vIartin, Brian Penton, Albert Camus., and Boris Pasternak.

References on literary forms and on particular authors will be ' supplied in lectures. " , .

Method of Assessment By assignment, seminar ,(opUonal),,£in,al written examination.

Part (i) (d) : Primary English IvJ:ethod 1 Yz ,hou:r s per week:,:

;', .:.;"

".,;;Dbe: cours;e~ will include :demoristra:tiori Ie Bsons 'in group reading, the e~t~,q.jSj<?Jk;qif ::r',~E!ldillig iriterests, the' or ganization of an S.R.A; Laboratory lesson, Formal English, and poetry appreciation.

In general, the course is 'a continuation and an extension of English Method - First Year (p.'6) .. Topics consideredffia'y include:'

~ :.'.: .l

Gr,oup'methods in teaching reading. Developing word recognition techniques. ," Standardized tests ,bf"v(),~r;l"rec9griitionand comprehension~:" S. R. A. '.'lord Games Laboratory. i.,

Developing comprehension skills. Developing oral reading ski1~s,. ,;. S. R. A. Reading Laborato rie's.fb~ silent reading skills. Extending reading interests.

, ,T.herLi~eratti.re Sampler .. ,Bi1~liotherapy.

Creative prose writing. , :' Ve'rse' composition.

S. R.A. Writing Skills Laboratorles. Correct usage. Punc tua tion.

';'Sentenc~ structur~. Teaching the parts of speech.

.- } '..1 ~ ,::

Developing poetry appreciation. Memorization lesson. T ~aching,dr.ama. ..' ',': " General follow up of English Method - First Year. (p.6)

" '1 . " .,;. ',.. .~ ,"

ASSignments and Essays - AnalySis and discussion'oCde'monstration material. Lesson pla.riS ~ 1 st: due Aprn ... lvIa:y ,2nd due Septertiber~ , Seminar - to be pre~red and presented by each student, in, se,cQ.J:jld; term.

Page 22: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

20

Reference Books,: , As for Englis~lV::ethod - First Year (p.6) Anderso~, P. S. : Language Skills in Elementary Education.

, 'j !',! ~.'

" Metho¢! qf~ss~ssment - By assignment, seminar papers, 'written '"examInation." . .'

," ',' J:' :' .. ,.".!i. ': :.::.l.

fI~ALTH EDU~ATIQN II Health Education ll,l~llr per w~.ek

, .' 1. The obJects and philosophy of Health Education.

2. The ~chievement of Personal ,Iiaalth and Happiness.

3. Food and Nutrition.

4. Ment~i Health, class discipline and self-discipline. '

·.5 .. The Central Nervous System • • ", .. ' .. r .

6. J\.1enta,.lRetardation, Brain Damage, and Sequelae • •• " •. " I" '.'

. ;,'·7 .·Gdtnniunication disorders in children.

:8. PUblic Health Services to School and Community ..

9. Venereal D~sease!S .•

10. First Aid.

Vl~,·.Gr,dVithatia'be:velopme'l1t. ,.

12. Drugs, alcohol, and tobacco.

Text Books:

'"

. .!:

Clements, F. W. : Child Health: its origins and promotion. ""Gardner" A.Vl:~.and Roylance, P. : New Essential First Aid •

... : ~ >;:- ' ,)Vallace,.,Y. H.,: Qood· Health: a guide to Preventive Medicine.

Reference Books: . JO~Sl' ]!;. B .. :,Hc:)alth for Effective Living. Schifferes, J J. ',:E ssentials of Healthier Living.

Method of Assessment - written examination at the end of third term.

MA THEMATICS II : lvlathematic s for the Primary Teacher

Not offered in 1969.

MUSIC n : Music in the Primary School 2 hours per week

Vocal, aural, reading and writing: Extension of 1st year work. Instrumental: Percussion-band, including score-writing; activities

with tuned percus sion instruments. Method & Techniques: Extension of first year work. Curriculum

study and programme planning. Listening: Extension of first year work.

Assignments and Essays - One term's prograrnine in mUSic, due 28th June. Percussion-band score, due 8th August.

Text BOoks:. Various Infant and Primary song-books used in class work. Music curriculum •.

. ' .. i .' ..... •

:R.~ference~99ks: Orff and E:(';letman : Music for Children, Book!.

; :

Method 6:£ Assessment - Progressive assessment through regular written and practical tests, and assignments.

...

"

Page 23: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

e

21

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II : Physical Education in the Primary School ?, hours per. week '

Theory and Pra~tice ()f Physical Education and Games. Programming ~ .', Small Side Team Games. Folk Dancing. Major Games. Athletics. Swimming and Life Saving. Carnival Organization.

Assignments and Essays -5 weeks programme for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and 6th classes. 3rd class programme to be finished before end of 1st term. , 4th and 5th class programmes to be finished before end of 2nd term. ' 6th class prog!amme ~obe finished before end of 3rd term.

Text Books: Depart~el1:t,()fEdu~ation, N. S. vY. : Primary Syllabus of Physical

,',':!:':',":' ',' ""., .. ," " Education. "

i'vIinistry of Education, London: Planning the Pro gramme. Iv.cinistry of Education, London: Moving and Growing. . , Department of Educatio.n, N.S.W.: : Physical Education in Primary

, School - A Handbook for Teachers. Department of Education, N. S. W. : Curriculum for ,Primary Schools,.

Reference Books: Sharp, C. : Countrypances. ,,' Department of ];ducation, N.S. W. : The Games Book. Cioiiege 'Library 613.71, 793, .796-799.

Method of Assessment- unit metb:od.

SCIENCE II : Natural Science Method 1 hour, per week,

. ) ":' ~ '", ," .

This subject has the following aims: " .•

1. to argue .(by, examp~e) ~h.a~ ~n approach tos~:ience teaching at primary "" 'scho6fwhich indudes opportunity for activity, discovery and pupil

involvement in observation and experiment is more interesting to the pupils and of greater value in an elementary science ec1ucation than a "chalk and talk" presentation of science.

2. to providea.backgro~(;lin some .areas of knowledge in Natural Science relevant to the primary ·school.

3. to demonstrate techniques for teaching ,this subject effectively at primary school level.

4. to make familiar the N. S. VI. Curriculum for Primary Schools in Natural Science.

Laboratoi:r'y/Practical,j~rk - Students will at times participate in elementaryobse~vatiotls, experiments and field studies.

Assignments and Essays - Each student will' (i) keep a pra~tical book for re.co.rding experiments and observations;

su~J:ri,itted 9~ceper .term'.. ,', ' " : " ,,'. • (ii) compile a rtJatural Science Reference Book of stencilled material,"

additional notes, etc. Submitted during the week prior, to the, a,pnual examinations',; , " "

Text Books: Mackean : Introduction to Biology. Leach: Australian Nature Studies. Department of Education: N; S. W. 'Curriculurh in Natu~al Science.

: j

Page 24: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

-"-------~--------------------

22

Reference Books: " '

Sale: A Teacher's' Guide to Fractical Science in the Primary School. U.N.E.S.C.O. Source Book for Science Teaching.

IVi.ethod of Assessment - Pass (and other gradings) will be made on the basis of quality in the above requirement,s (listed undera'ssignments and essays). Students who do not reach a satisfactory standard in the above may be required to sit for a final examination.

SOCIAL SCIENCE II : Forces at Work iI). SocietX 2 hours per week

1. Some Forces of Change in Society. 2. Background to Some Chronic World Proplems, 3. The lvlechanics of 'Government in AU,stralia. 4. IV,leeting People of Influ.ence in our Society.

, ;:

ASSignments and Essays - Fiv~ short - 500 word - aSSignments -spaced over year.

: Method of Assessmeht - By means of tests and aSSignments through­out year.

PART II 0 --- YEARU ,"

Option'Subjects for Primary and Infant Courses • • ',' t .' : :.

ART:: lIO': Practical Art 2 hours per week

This course will cover exploratory exercises in: , (a) Drawing -Life 'and environmental subjects using ,a va:~lety of

media including pen and wash. (b) Painting - Still life, portrajtureand figure composition. (c) Appreciation of Australian Painting with emphaSis on contemporary

works. -,':; ,

Practical Work - see above. Use of colour slides to illustrate (c)~ Visit. to galleries. ; ;

"Assignments and Essays'- Practical exercises each week supplemented by two essays per term on (c). '

Reference Books: .) ;"

Smith, Bernard ': Australian Painting.

Method of Assessment -On prattical exercises and short essays.

CRAFT II ,Oa : Advanced Primarx Craft 2 hours per week

This course p:rovides opportunity for the' study and practice of a number of craft activities designed to develop skill in the methods of teaching each and to foster a general appreciation of good craftsrrianship.hl the selection of topics, consideration is given to student interest and ability. Emphasis is placed upon the practice pf skills.

Practical work forms an integral part of the course and. students will be required to construct a variety of exercis'es related t6the topic s discussed. .. !,'\

Assig~ents ~ndEssays - A~ essay of 800-1000 words- due fourth week of third term - is required.

Reference Books: Collins, A. F Bookcrafts for, Senior ,Studenl;,s. Finn, Jan;1es D. :, ..(\udio-:- Vis~al Equipment lv.fanual.

..

Page 25: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

23

Kemp, Jerra14.,~ .. :plan~in.g a~d Producing Audio-Visual Materials. ~ ,. '.~ .. :j(: :.HXJ' ',::I'! .~~ t~ .. 1· (.; <:.,:~, .:i ',.:, -:'.:.j'~ .~. j ),,',, "F,:,' ." " ... '

Method of As~e,ssmet!t - Pr9gressive evaluation . . :- : ,j .L.c .L' " :.: : ... ' ~.) U . ~ I. ", •. ' ", :. •. J '.

Ob : Advan'~ed Primary Craft 2 hours per week

This courSe is an extension of the Craft I Option course (p.ll). The approach is to be practical.

Projects will be selected from the follOWing: bookcrafts, cane work, cotton applique, paper sculpture. leathercraft, ceramics, and art metalwork.

Practical Work - Panels (4" square), cane sewing basket with lid, cloth panel (cotton or cloth applique), table lamp (ceramics), neck or wrist ornament (enamel). etch design in copper.

ASSignments and Essays - Notes to be prepared on each project. These notes to be in the form of work sheets suitable for dispiay in the class room.

Text Books: As for Primary Craft (p.15)

........ i)t; .: .. : .

Reference Books: Moseley, Johnson, Koenig: Crafts DeSign •

.. .;,: "

Iv.ethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation. , : ~': : .' .~: i:) .

EDUCA TION II Oa : Clinical Education 2 hours' 'per week'

• ~._, _____ '_A'

: I :.

The student has been introduced to the clinical method in the class room ~n first yea X; (p.llh This option deals with the study 'of specific areas of atypical be-hCi.viour exhibited by the Primary and Infant school child. Such difficulties will be studied under the three headings:

(a) atypical behaviour due to or ganic disability, (b) atypical behaviour concerned with disabilities in sp~cific school

subjects, . (c) atypical behaviour attributable to emotional diffiClilties.

ASSignments and Essays -1. Reporting on an interesting child (500 words) - due first wee'k Term II. 2. Essay (1000 words) - progress reports due from fifth week of Term 1. 3. Essay (2000 words) - due last week Term II. 4. Reports (300 words) on five visits to special classes, etc. - spaced

throughout yea~ •.

. Method of Assessment - ProgreSSive assessment on aSSignment work.

Ob : Psycholo gy 2 hours per week

This course is a continuation of I st year Psychology Optiori.(p. 12), intendeCi. to cover;substantially those areas dealt with in Psychology I at University.:Topics of study will include:

,M~thodology and Statistics. Sensation and Perception. +=,e;rs,onalHyand . Personal Adjustment. l'.'.otivation and Emotion. Learning anclL:earning Theory.

As;si!gumehts~.n'JEssays - One major semin~r. topic (3000 words). tOlC'.

be delivered to the group. Due 18th Ju1y, 1969.'

Page 26: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

24

Reference Books: "'List'of refererices will be issued at various stages during the course.

Method of Assessment - Student progress will be evaluated by seminar work and a class test at the end of the course.

Oc : The Slow Learner 2 hours per week

This course aims to give students an Understanding of factors related tolearni~g disability:. its diagno.sis, and approaches to the adjustment of the sChoolprogra;rnme; to compens~tefor·.it in the classroom. situation.

Assignroentsand Essays: - One. major seminar topic (3000 words) to be ~eiiv:er~d to the group at .an appropriate stage during the course.

Reference Books: Lists.of refere~ce books relevant to various aspects of the course

will, beprovide~ throughout the ye~r. .' ' .. 1 .. ' :, .

Method of Assessment - Student progress will be evaluated by seminar work and class tests.

ENGLISH II Oa : Drama 2 hours per week

The course consists of three strands: (a) Expression andCommunico.tion through drama, including drama

in the school. (b) Stagecraft: acting, production, deSign, stage management, set

construction, costume, lighting, sound, make-up. (c) History of EIlglish Theatre and Contemporary Styles:M'ediaeval;

Eti~.abethan;. Restoration; 18th Century <:omedy~ 19th Century" rnel<;>drama; modern realism; modern non-realistic :theatre; musical; dance-drama; non-scripted drama.

Activities will'include practical exercises in the above and Some public performance .

ASSignments and Essays - One of 1000 words on a topic.from (c) above. One of 500 words on another topics from (c) above.

Reference Books: Way, B. : Developm~nt through Drama. Fiala, O. : Drama inAction. College Library at 792.09. 822.

Iv.:.ethod of Assessment - Practical work and aSSignments.

Ob : Literature I hours per week

The course aims -1. To provide opportunity for study in depth along lines of students' own

iinter~ sts: in mode rn poetry, drama, Rovel. 2." 'To provide a.better perspective of modern technical developments in

drama and the novel, and of the major concerns of literatUre in the twentieth century - these to be investigated by lectures, discussion and seminar papers.

3. To introduce the students to .research m.ethods in literary studies.

Practical Work - Library and periodical research.

ASSignments and Essays - Long essay, 1500-2000 worc;ls due Septemberdn thetnatic'topic to provide for. (3) above.' ..

l\tiethod of Assessment - Essay, progressive evaluation, final written examination.

. ~.

Page 27: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

2.5

PHYSICAL EDUCA 'fION II OCl. ": . The Dance 2 hours per week ........ .

This subject is intended for \lomen Students only and will present the area of dance to a tertiary level.

1. The Dance - basic movements.

2. The Dance - English and Continental expressive dances.

3. Dance Making.

4. Dap.~e Choreography.

Reference Books: Hayes, Elizabeth R. ; Dance Composition and Production. Sorell, Walter: The Dance has many Faces.

Ob : Games and Athletics 2 hours per week

This subject is intended for Men and Women Students and is intended to extend their knowledge in the following areas.

1. PhySiology - The s~eletal muscular and cardio-respiratory systems~

2. Fitness - Theory of Movement - Circuit Train,ing.

3. Umpires l Certificates in two major sports.

Reference Books: f. .. L. S. S. Manual. Pnysical Education Co-op. : Track and Field. Le Maistre : PhYSical Education.

Method of Assessment - Unit work tests.

SOCIAL SCIENCE II Oa : Geography 2 hours per week·

This course involves individual study and research.in a variety of topics in Geography, in consultation with the lecturer. . .

ASSignments and Essays - Regular reports on reading and research.

lv.i.ethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Ob : History

This is a course of individual reading in selected areas of History; a selection being made after discussions between student and tutor.

ASSignments and Essays - Regular reports on reading and research.

Iv:..ethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Page 28: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--------~.------------.----~

26

ALLOCATION OF LECTURE HOURS TO SUBJECTS

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (2 YEAR) - INFANT TEACHING

YEAR. I YEAR II

SUBJECT Hrs/wk SUBJECT Hrs/wk

Art 1 0 Art II 2 Crafts I 2 Crafts II 1 Education I 4 Education II 4 English I 4 English II 4 Health Education I 0 Health Education II 1 Mathematic s I 2 Mathematic s II 1 Niusic I 2 Music II 2

"Physical Education I 1 Physical Education II 2 Science I I 2

I Science II 1

Social Sci.enc e 1 J.' 2

.1

Social Sci enc e II 2 DemonstrationS} I 2 ,DemonstrationS} II '2 Observations I Observations Option Subjec t I !

2 Option SubjeCt II 2 , ,

Total ! 23 Total "

" ' 24 , I

, I

Notes on the Infant Teaching Course:

1. All Option Subjects are the' same as those provided for Primary Teaching and for subject outlines of these option subjects please refer to the outlines for the Teacher IS Certificate (2-year) '- Primary Teaching.'

2. Refer also to the general n()tes under the heading of Pri~ary Teaching for , information ori Demonstrations, Supplementary and O:u~alifying subjects and Practice Teaching. (p. 1) ,

"i.;

Page 29: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

"

27

DETAILS OF COURSE SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED FOR THE TEACHER'S

CER TIFICATE - 2- YEAR - INFANT TEACHING COURSE

PART I --- YEAR I

ART I : Art for the Infant Teacher 2. hours per wee~

Notoffered in 1969.

CRAFTS I : Crafts for the Primary and Infant Teacher 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.3)

EDUCATION I : Educational Psychology Ca) and Iniant Education. 2 hours per week .

EEcept that this subject as taught to prospective Infant Teachers will have a bias towards the Infant School and its pupils, the subject material is exactly as set out for Teachers' Ce':rtificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching Education I : Educational Psychology (a) (p.4)

ENGLISH I 4 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p. 4).

Hf~LTH EDUCATION I 1 hour per week

Not offered in 1969.

lv.J\ l'HElVlA TICS. I ., .. ' !. . , •

2 hours per week " ! ..... ,.

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.8)

MUSIC I 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.8)

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I 1 hour per week

Physical Education in the Infant School

The Games Lesson. The Gymnastic Lesson. Method. Swimming and Lifesaving.

Refe rence Books: H. M. S. Office: Moving and Growing. Lifesaving Manual.

Method of Assessment - Unit Tests.

SCIENCE I : Natural Science Method 2 hours per week

A detailed study will be made of the Curriculum for Natural Science for primary schools. In relation to this,topics discussed will include:

Concept development. Selecting suitable activities.

Page 30: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

28

, ;;Methods ofpresentation~ , ' " "Adapting "content to the child's int~rests and abilities .. ~ecording .. '" ' , ' " , Developiiiga:n: unde£standing of the methods of science. Developing an appreciation of the contribution of science to man's welare. Developing a science programme. Extending interest in science beyond the classroom: projects, out­door activities, library facilities, etc.

Laboratory/practical work - one period per week correlated with theory lecture s.

Assignments and Essays - Practice teaching on assignment re practical wor;k in Jnfant school due 2nd ,week 2nd term (l000 words)

Text Books: Curri.culum for .Prhnary Schools- Natural Science.'

Reference Books: Burnett: Teadhing Science in the Elementary School. Gz.'aig! Science for the Elementary School Teacher. Leach' : Australia'nNature Studies. '

Method of Assessment - Periodic Testing.

SOCIAL SCIENCE I 2 hours per week

\ , :, :. J ~ .

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.lO)

PART 10 YEAR I Option subjects for Primary and Infant Courses.

Refer to subjects appearing under this heading in the details of Subjects prescribed for Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching, (pp.10-14).

,. '. ~',

.' .!":" J~.: :-.1; , {; ',' i,'" ~ ' .. : . -. .. "" ._.... . .~ ... ~ .. " ...... - .... _.", .

..

Page 31: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

29

PART II YEAR IT ; '",~' .

ART II : Education through Art in the Infan,t School. 2 hours per week .

This course will include the study of child development ;through art expression from pre-school to'Infant level. , .. ,'

. ,. ' , .

re~ching me,thods and techniques will be demonstrated and discussed and case histories studied.

media.

Appreciation of great works of Art.

Visits to galleries to view and discuss contemporary works.

Fractical work - Exploratory exercises in line, colour and plastic

Assignments and Essays - Short essays, three per. term~ One long essay (min. 3000 words) due June-October.

. (j I. .. i

Text Books: Gombrich : Story of Art. Tomlinson: Children as Artists.

Reference Books: Lowenfield & Brittain : Your Child and his Art. Lowenfield& Brittain: Creative and l\Ilental Growth • Ch;;.s-e : Famous Painting. Phoenix: The Impressionists and their World. Phoenix: The Ivioderns and their World.

Method of Assessment - Short written a:ssignn'lents:, th,~~~ per term, and two half-yearly longer essays - Practical exerciiles. !r ,

CRAFT II: : Craft lvlethod for the Infant Sch~ol 2 hours per week

.,; I

This is a practical course,' designed to provide students with a range of ideas and techniquesuseful in the pr.eparation of handw<>:rk activities.

The course will include: Pre-School Education. Educational objectives of handwork. Basic Skill Development. , lv .. anipulative Skill Developmeri't. Creative'development through handwork. lvl.edia suited to Infant Handwork. Classroom administration. Lesson preparation. Teaching Aids and their application.

Practical work forms an integral part of the co~rse and students will be required to plan and implement a variety of act~vities .r.elated to the va.:rious topics discussed.

Assignments and Essays - Three practicalassignmen~s, one due each term.

Reference Books: " .'

Johnson. Pauline: Creating with Paper. Becke~ : Adventllres with Scissors and Paste.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Page 32: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

30 ---

EDUCA TION II 4 hours pe r week

Part (i) :Educational Psychology - Infant Teaching 2 hours pe r week

This course covers two major areas: (a) the physical, social, 'emotional, intellectual and moral develop­

mentof the child with emphasis on pre- school and Infant grade children; and

(b) factors influencing children's learning, emphasising the pupil -teacher relationship.

Assigrurtents and Essays - Assignments of approx. 600-1000 words each are r e.qui red every three (3) weeks.

Text Books: C Qnn~ll, W. : Foundations of Education. Frandsen, A. : Educational Psychology.

Method of Assessment - Continuous evaluation throughout the year. This is done by assignments and class tests.

Part (ii) : lviodern Educational Practice (a) 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate- 2-year '.:. Primary Teaching (p. 16).

ENGLISH 11 4 hours per week

Part (i) : Children '.sLiterature 1 hour per week: (1 Semester)

Refer to Teacher's Certific~te - 2-year- Primary Teaching (p.17).

Part (ii) : The Modern Novel and Short Story .: 1 hour per, week

, j.: :;: ~', • •.

Refer to Teacher's; Ge:rtHicate';' 2-year -Primary Teaching (p.18)

Part (iii) : Poetry 1 hour per week (1 Semester)

A brief account of the development of children's poetry. Study of a number and., va.riety of poer:p.s to develop understanding and di sc rimina tion . . . . Techniques and some forms wili be copsidered. Particular attention will be given to influential modern Australian poets. <J.'

Assignments and Essays - One short assignI:nent~ due ,early second term ,invi:>lving observation and collec"ting of mat~rial during practice .. teaching,' and an e'ssay of about 750 words on an aspect of modern poetry.

Text Books: ")HayWatd;:Pen~in' Book of English Verse.

Reference Books: to be given in lectures.

Method of Assessment - Assignment and examination.

Page 33: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

~'

31

Part (iv) : English IVi:ethod in the Infant School 2 ~o,urs per week

The c;ou rae in 'Vol 'Ve s amplification of 'the subjec ts trec..ted in firs t year,discussion of Reading, Spelling, Literature, Drama, Oral and Written Expression a:nd Work on Programmes and Tinletables for Infant Grades (Kindergarten, 'First and Second Grades).

Reading.,. Types of Reading Lessons, including Activity and Gro'Q.p Reading. Principles of writing and treatment of basic reading primers. E:xIensive Reading - library ~f:\d supplementary work. ' Chalkboard~eading.

, '

Handwriting - The use of manuscript. Syllabus requirements. Principle"s involv~d in the movement from fluency and pre-writing exercises to written material. Synthetic and analytic.

Expression - Correct usage - a positive approach to the development of acceptable grammatical habits. Expression in formal and informal language activities. Method and scope of correction. Extension of vocabulary. '

Written Expression - Relating needs in written work to the maturational standard of the,c,hild,." ';t'heformal, informal and diary approaches. Correction. Appreciation. Creative writing.

Conversation 'Periods - The technique of a morning conversation period. Variations in procedure according to variations in aim - conversation to foster expression, to elicit information, to develop a code of behaviour.

Spelling - Becomuig' "word conscious". Emphasis on spelling as a-written activity. Spe llin.g by sight, sound, touch, letter names. Use of, word-grouping. Selection of suitable lists with reference to the needs of the chUd and cor,relation with reading. Development of interest in and positive, ap'p~oach to ,words. ,Dictation for testing. Methods of correction. , '

Literature - Principles of selection of poems suitable for (a) memorrzation

,(b )a,pp.reciation. Methods of presentation. The importance of enjoyment. Lesson procedures. Principles for, th~ selection of stories suitable for telling and reading. Methods of presentation. Stories for children's re-telling. StoIies for draIl?-atization. Serial stories.

Drama - Informal - for expression and as a teachingaid. Formal -' dramatic activities including acting of stories and poems, development of expression of character and feeling. Use of simple properties~ Puppetry and ,mime.

Creative Play and Creative Activities.;. Types of activities. Use in social tra1ninp a~d developlng informal language activities. Use to develop gro~p dis,cussion. JVlotivation for early reading.

Kindergarten - Training in listening skills. Preparation and motiv­ation for later reading. Training in the skills needed to prepare for reading.

ProgramrtiingandTimetables - Prindples and procedure~ as. they relate to the needs 'arid abilities of the 5-8 year old child.

The Lower Division - Adaptation of lesspn procedures for use in teaching Lower Divlsion. ' , '

Demonstrations - Lessons illustrative of procedures and met};lods are given at the Demonstration School and ~ully discussed.

Practical work - Five sets of collected pra,ctica,l lllat~rial.

Demonstrations.

Assignments and Essays - Analysis and comment on above practical material - due 1. First Term; 2. Second Term; 3. Third Term.

Page 34: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

32

Text Books: .. ~ •..

Goddard, Nora L. Reading in the Modern Infants School. Renwick, A. and I.D. : Some Nlodern Lesson Procedures for Infant

i, 'i. Grades. Newtex Productions, Newcastle, 1963. Renwick, A. and J.D. : Programming Composition in Infant Grades.

, '.. Newtex Productions, Newcastle, 1964. Renwick, A. and 1. D. : Programming Reading in Infant Grades.

Newtex Productions, Newcastle, 1966 •

. Refe reriee 'Books: 'F~:;::ster'arid He;ldley : Education in the Kindergarten. American Book

Co., New York, 1959. McKee.and Harrison.: Let's Talk - Annotated Teacher's Guide.

IVlethod of Assessment - Progressive assessment with alternative examination.

HEALTH EDUCA TrON II" 1 hour per we ek

Refer to Teacher';a Certificate - 2-year .. Primary Teaching (p.20).

MA THENIA TICS II : Iv.iathernatic:3 Method for the Infant School 1 hour per weel.;:

St\.ldy ox topic s and methods suggested in the syllabus, with emphasis being placed on Cuif,e~ai1~e Method. T,.~~atment will.be given to the psychological theories of' Piaget and Bruner C'nd their role in shaping the mathematicscurr­iculum.

Assignr.nents and EssaYiJ - Five minor assignments, set one week i~' advance J each involvinG o:~e f':J~lGc:c,p page of work - due 18th, April, 20th Jun'e, 18th July, 15th Augu!Jt, 19th. Scp~cmber.

Refcre~lce Booke: Yates. HalTI.Eton, Ha.ckett : Modern Niathematics with Structured

JViaterials. Cole,. A. L.: 10. Fractica.lGuide·to Cuisenaire Mathematics.

'ltiethod of AS8eGs:.n.erit :.. Fir~al Examination.

MUSIC II : ~v'Iusic in the Ir.Li:.:mt School 2 hou~s pel", week

. V6cal,aural,reading cmd writing: Extension of first year w()rk. Instrumental: Fercussion-band, including score-writing; ac;:~ivj~ies with tuned percussion instruments. . ..."'" .... . Method and Techniques: Extension of first yearw'ork. Curriculum study and prog::amme planning. Listening: Extensio?1 of first year work.

Assignments anri Essays - Collection pf songs and piano pieces for use with Infant classes (app:i.-m{o 30 hours' work), due 10th September.

Text Books: Var~.o'..:·.·: I~", . ,_ "··rL-1'~'·:V ~onf,-~1oc'k:.S used in class work. Music Cn::oriculum.

Reference Books: Bavin : Percussion-band from A to Z.

Method of Assessment - Progressive ?ssessment through regular written and practical tests, and assignments.

:.,

Page 35: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

3.3

PHY SICAL ~DUCA TION .ll Z ho~r~ per week

.Phy.sicalEducation in- the Infant School

1. The Danct:PLesson.

Z. The Gymnastics Lesson.

3. The Games Lesson.

4. Displays.

5. Method.

Text 1300ks : H.lvy_. S. Office Moving and Growing.

Reference Books: Ruth Lovell Murray: Dance in Elementary Education. Russel, Joan: Creative Dance in Primary School. Schurr, Evelyn L. : Movement Experience for Children.

Method of Assessment - Unit tests. ",' . '" '.' .

SCIENCE II : Natural Science Method 1 hour per week

The purpose of the course is to help students understand the role of science in the primary school and the type of experience which may proftably be provided at this level.

A detailed study will be made of the Curriculu.m for Natural Science for Primary Schools.

Emphasis will be placed on: 1. Selecting suitable activities. Z. Methods of presentation. 3. Simplified scientific method.

Laboratory/practical work - 1 period per two weeks correlated with theory lectures.

Assignments and Essays - Practice teaching assignment on nature table due second week of second term (1500 words).

Text Books: Curriculum for Primary Schools - Natural Science.

Refe rence Books: Burnett: Teaching Science in the Elementary School. Leach: Australian Nature Studies.

Method of Assessment - Feriodic Testing.

SOCIAL SCIENCE II Z hours per week

Part (i) : Asian Studies

Asian Studies will be approached through individual research. Following the study of different Asian countries, cultural, educational. historical, economic or geographical topics will be chosen for research presentation.

Part (ii) : Social Studies Method

This course aims at developing in the student teacher a wider and deeper understanding of the issues involved in "socialliving" I a perspective view and the ability to decide on criteria.

Page 36: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

34

"yarietyin Lesson Proc;edure" is the 'course theme and it is aimed at ensuring a £1exihleapproach to programming and the development of an understanding of the individual initiative that lies with the teacher in her selection of material and its presentation.

These methods will be approached by way of (a) Case Studies. (b) Method V/orkshops. (c) Demonstrations at The Junction School.

Assignments and Essays - Research Assignments - 1500 words -due 20th June and 20th September. Method Assignment..: due 6th June.

IV~ethod of Assessment -' Progressive assessment using tutorials, assignments, and reports on research.

PART II 0 YEAR II Option Subjects forF'rimary and Infa~t Course s.

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (pp.22-25).

. . ~ .

".

Page 37: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

..

35

~;:A.LLOCATIONS OF LECTURE - HOURS TO SUBJECTS

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (2 YEAR) - - GEOGRAPHY/COMMERCE

YEAR I YEAR II

':'SUBJECT Hrslwk SUBJECT Hrs/wk

' ... , ,. ..

Education 11 4 Education II 4 English I 2 English II 2 Health Education I 0 Health Education II 1 Physical Education I 2 Physical Education II 2 Social Science I l~ Social 5cienceII 14 ..

Demonstrations J I Observations

2 Demon stration SJII Observations

2

..

TotaL 25 Total 25

There are no option subjects.

Supplementary and qualifying subjects I tutorials and practice teaching are as set out under the heading of the Primary Course .

Page 38: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

36

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED FOR TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE

- 2-YEAR - GEOGRAPHY/COMMERCE COURSE

PART I YEAR I

EDtr~A1'IONI;Educationa1Psycho1ogy (Secondary) a 4 hours per week

Refer to TEiaCIier's Certificate - 2 year - Primary Teaching (p.4). This· subject will cover the sarn.e ground as set out in Education I : Educational psychology (a.) , but will have an emphasis upon secondary pupils and their needs.

ENGLISH I 2 hours per week

Part (i) : Cultural Studies in Literature 1 hour per week

1. The study of selected Shakespearean plays.

2. The study of the literary forms - novel, poem, play, short story.

"Assigrurients and Essays - 1000 words on Poet due beginning of Term 2. 500 words on Novelist due beginning of Term 3.

Text Books: B.e~ket : Waiting for Godot. Ha yward : Penguin B·ook of IVl.odern Ve rse. Hemingwa y : Old lVlan and The Sea. Hemingway: First 49 Stories. Shakespeare: 15 Plays.

Reference Books: Commentaries by Boas, Bradley, Dowden, Hazlitt, Hudson, Iv.:.asefie1d, Logan Pearsall Smith, Stopford Brooke, Speaight, Wilson, lV.Lidd1eton Iviurry. Pelican Guides to English Literature, Vo1s 1-7. "Writers and their Work" Pamphlets. Campbell, L. B. : Shakespeare's Histories; Shakespeare's Tragic

Heroes. Charlton, H. B. : Shakespearian Comedy. Forster, E. M. : Aspects of the Novel. Granville Barker: Prefaces to Shakespeare. Halliday, F. : The Foetry of Shakespeare's Plays. Knight, G. Wilson: The Crown of Life; The Wheel of Fire. Leavis, F. R. : The Great Tradition; Common Pursuit. O'Faolain: The Short Story. Ridley: Shakespeare's Plays. Spencer, Hazelton: The Art and Life of William Shakespeare. Tillyard : Shakespeare's History Plays. Wilson, J. Dover: Six Tragedies of Shakespeare. Bates, H. E. : The Short Story. Also College Library at 822.33; 800-829.

Method of Assessment - Assignments and Final Examination.

Part (ii) : Oral Expression 1 hour per week

1. To discuss the Elements of Delivery and Communication and the Principles and Techniques of Various Forms of Oral Expression.

Page 39: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

37

2. To indicate Method of Assembling. Selecting, Arranging arid Assimilating JY.iaterials for Talks and Speeches~ The Form 'of a: Talk(Speech, Lesson). Use and Handling·of.Notes {palm cards}. Styles.' Establishmg, a Case -

reaSOll~:l.'l'g." ' . ,"1 " '~.!: ..... .

3. To provide stud~ntswith some~pportunities to practise speaking effect­ively, clearly, pleasantly and acceptably in variO'us kinds of speech situations.

4. To encourage in the students critical attitudes and discrimination as listeners and provide them with criteria for judging speakers and spee.ches.

Principles and Techniques will be discussed and amplified and illustra'ted by films and recordings (tape and disc).

(i) Voice Colour: meaning as thought and feeling; voice times, ra:nge of tone" varietyoi intonation; volume andprojection; pace~ .pitch, inflections; , emphasis, rhythm.'~;

(ii) Basic Essentials of theSpeech Situation,: To be s.een (general appearande ,stance, balance, posture, deportment, gesture, facial expression, eye-contact); to be heard (audibility), to be understood (intelligibility); to be "felt" (conveying of feeli~g, emotion, mood, attitude), employment of acceptabl~ pronunciation, grammatical forms and word usage . Personality - what the speaker looks like, what,the speaker sounds l~k~,,; effect 00 others. Faults. " , .

(iii) Basic Steps in the Speaking Situa~ion·.' ,.-Aml.lysis of Aim, Audience and Subject; 'Planriirig"- As'sembly, Selection,' Arrangement and Illustrations (verbal and visual) of Material. Delivery -Direct-ness, Liveliness. . ...

(iv) Structure of a Talk (Lesson) as' a, 'ComposiUon.. : Concept of Form. Introduc tion - intcre st arouser" JWRBil"ta:qf,eo~ ~':1:bjec~, statement of aim, theme, use of "key" 'words; outline of main points; Body or Development - interesting and l0giccH; Gonclusi6n- Summary, responf'le, what to do. Recapitulation. Relatio~slU,p;bet'W:een A,im and Response.

(v) Voice Production: Respirc:l.tic>~- fil'4-,I?ply ~nd.controlof breath; diaphragm and interco'stal muscie~Y Phonation; Resonation; Sounds (articulation and enunciation); Pronuhciation:' Diction. Phra~ing and PaUSing (sense .. a.ild bl'~athJ?auses).

5. Some Practical Speech F~rms- Informal and Formal. (i) Reading aloud and speaking of prose and verse in unison, in

group,s, individually, chorally. (ii) Everyday Speech Situations' - Conversation; use of telephone

and microphone; classroom talks. Interviews; question and answer.

(iii) Information Speeches - own-choice topics, set;topic~,explanClUol)' of a process, description of an exhibit. . ..·:i

(iv) Discussion Group Work - group aSSignment lesson; the class meeting; points of view,; ,the: discussion l~ssoIi.'. :

(v) Debating - liParHamentary" and formal. Adjudication.' (vi) Speeches for special occasio~~ ap,d ,Ceremonials. ~ vote~,of thanks.

'Introducing a speaker; ·nresentati:o.n a~(j :rec.eiyingp(aWa~ds" etc.; Commonwealth Da.'y',etc~"; . toast's." .,'

" (viiLImprornptl;l. Speaking:- !'chain-reaction" talks.' ' (viii)!.teadingo£' d~~unaticdialogue, direct speech .•. Descriptive' '"

pa~.sage;s.; .

'Practical wotk ~ 'see~e';c'ti6n5 above. ',":

, Assignrn~~ts and Es~ay~,~,\gr.epar~~ionfor sp~ech'i!.ctivities..,

.,:":';:'

',. ',/

'. : ~'

, .. ~':, t . . ~ ..

',t',!:

Page 40: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

38

Text BQoks: ,13ullard and Lindsay: Speech at Wprk. McAllister: A Year's Course in Speech Training~ Department of Education: Speech Education: A Handbook for

Secondary Teachers.

Refe rence Books: See College Library 808.85.

lVlethod of Assessment - Practical speech tests and written test.'

HEALTH EDUCATION I

Not offered in 1969.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I : Secondary Physical Education , 2 hours per week

1. Administration and principles of Physical Educatio~, •. ,

2, Planning a Games Lesson.

3. Minor Games, e.g. Post Ball, Corner Ball.

4. Major Games: Softball, Hockey, Cricket. Racquet Games, Rugby.

·5. Athletics: (a) Basic techniques of track and field. (b) Standards. (c) Or ganisation of Athletic s Carnival.

6. Gymnastics: (a) Lesson Plan. (b) Mat and Box Work. (c) Rope and Bar Work.

7. Body Mechanics - the skeletal system.

8. Swimming and Life Saving.

9. Tabloid Sports.

Text Books: Handbook for SwimmingInstructors.

Reference Books: Department of Education: The Alternative Curriculum in PhySical

Education for Secondary Schools.

PhYSical Education Publication: .Track and Field. Dewitt, R. J. : Teaching Individual and Team Sports. R. L. S. Aust. : Life Saving kanual.

Method of Assessment - Unit tests.

SOCIAV SCIENCE I 15 hours per week

, "

Part (i)': Social Studies Content and Background:. 12 hours ,per week

;, This course' in: the field of Histo~y, Geo graphy a~d CQ~merce involves individual study based on a:' tut6ria.'1 system. '

Six lecturers of the'Social Studies staff will act as tutors a.nd;e~ch will be responSible for a small group of, students. 'Each studentwillineet his tutor at least once a week, probably for a lecture period. After pre­liminary assessment. a course will be designed to suit the requirements of the individual. . ..

ProviSion is being made for occasional short c~urses to be given by members of the Social Science staff and other lecturers. These are

Page 41: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

39

aimed at illuminating certain specific aspects of the cour.se·.

lVlethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation, seminars and tests as indicated in lectures.

~. :.'

Pa rt (ii) : Soc ial Studi e s Me thad, ; 1 hour per week

1 •. Wll?t, is"S9;ci~l·S.tudie,s 1·

'2~" 'The 'Nattire'6f the 'Synabtise's 'at present 'F'orm'!' .' . .

Form II. III, IV . , r" ;., ,.4~c;tivity ; , .

Asian S()cial Studies·

3. Programming.

4. Teaching Techniques . . ' , ".~ \

5. Teaching aids.

6. Testing.

Reference Books: )f.~,n,ton,:,.~ ::n~e NewSo.dal Studies.

~. , . ..

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation •.

Part (iii) : Commerce '-'··Book'~keeping .. ···· 2 hours per week

: .. ',

t.! :

, '.',',

, '. . . ."; " .; .; : . . ) . . " . ~' ; I:.' :. .',. '. . . . . . . ',' . ~. .' .' " t :

, 'This' cours'e aims at enabling ,studeQ.~~' ~o,.~cquire ~ sound knowledge of accounting principles. in addition t'o~in:t;tii~~dtlg'Jhem t,o the va:.:~ous approaches to comme rcial practice as taught in J.n~ second,a,ry schc;lOl.,

This course will cover -(a) Accounting concepts~ (b) Books of original entry. (c) Ledger postings. (d) Preparation of trial balance s. (e) Correction of errors. (f) Analysis of profit and capital.

,i "

\ ' ; . ~

(g) Preparation oiTrading Account. Profit and Loss Accoqnt~ • , "o' • ,,;, 1 '. ", ;",' .. :, " • • ..' :. " "

ASSignments and Essays .,.Du,ring the courSe a number of exercis~s will be set for correction by the lecturer. In addition. three term tests will be conducted.

Text Books:

: ;

J,'at;rles ",W .,E.: New W,ay to ,Book-keeping Part 1. . Newtex'Productions, :, ,Newcastle.

. " ~ l , j

James, W. E. : New Way to Book-keeping Part ill New~e,x ,1?l;'Qductions, Newcastle. ;;

'Ja:mes,W~ E. ':: KeY':W.tanual' to Part f. New'te;x Productions, Newcastle. i • I.

t'

Refe:rence.Books: "." Gallagher, R. E. : Our Commercial Environment Book 1 and 2. Angus

. '. ,:, : ",,": ?:,Il:~ ~,!be~t.sp~7 ,.' ,....'" .' \ i,.:i . . "Gallagher, R~'E.: : Accounting Solution. Angu$ an.d.I}pbert,~on: •..

Perrill:,; 1\. vi >:BgoK:~ke'~pingfor,ge~prl(lary StJ,lCletlts. Whi~c()mbeTombs . Yorston, R.K., Sini'th, ~. B., Brown, S.R,. : ElemeI,ltary Ac1counting.

\ :.f ;,. . '.' '.'. '. .. Law Book Co. " ~ ,; .' . . :.

Method of Assessment: - 'Progressive'evaluatic:>n::~ .. ::

~ . ','

.. :

Page 42: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

40 -.''';

PART II YEAR. II

E'DUCATION"li 4 hours pe r week

Part (i) : Educational Psychology 2 hours per week

.J'"

This course will deal with the following main 'topics: a teaching- . learning model; child and adolescent development; group dynamics; soci~l·

ization; the family; the 1earner;th~ process of instruction; coping with stress.

Assignments and Essays - Six essay-type assignments of approximately 600 words length, due on the following dates: 21st March, 18th April, 27th June, 25th July, 15th August, 3rd October.

Text Books: Connell, ,\V. F. et a1 : The Foundation of Education.

Reference Books: Lindgren, .H. : An Introduction to Social Psychology. Lindgren, H. : Social Psychology. .:.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation by assignments and three tests (one test per term~. ,:'

: .\

Part (ii) : Modern Educational Practice 2 hours per week

" , >

A broad view of the su1?ject of Education including treatlflent of: >",., (i)"Th:e;::rtistory of BduC'ation in N. S. W.; .... .

(ii) The'Phiios'ophy of Educ~ltl~n; .. '. (iii) Comparative Educa'tionj' . • (iv) Curriculum; (v) Administration and Teachers' Handbook;

(vi) The Wyndham Report; (vii) Discipline;

(viii) Pro gramming; (ix) Creativity; (x) Audio-visual aids.

,".::: :

,.}, ...• {',

: "",

I.' "'j ".'/ ." \:.

AssigrimentsandEssays - three exercises (questions and answers) of 50.0 words each •. : One essay of 1000 words. ",

. ~: '

".'\', ':.', .i.'

Text 'Books: Connell, W.F. et al : The Foundations of Education. Sydney, Novak,

1962. : , .... ·f ';

h:.Jh~~<!~1·e,l'r..A..E. ,:. The Dereloptnentof Education in the Twentieth Century. New York, Prentice-Hall, 1949.

::R~fer(mce BookS: "Pi

ConnelJ, VI. F. : The Foundations of Seco;"dary Educati0l?-. ¥e,lbourne, . 1 ... ·\ \.~ A.C.E.R.,: 1962. '. " .

Cubberley, E. P. : The History of Education. 'Boston, Houghton

o ' .':.: ~. Iv.dfflin,· ,1948. :': .. , ::,. . ,. '". . ... !"

lViethod of Assessment - Th~ general'l''equi~ement of this subject is that each stud~nt·pa.s$:es in each unit of the subje~t~; and' doe's all assignments ·an:d'clas<s·tesb;.· Each unit c'ori'slsts ofa terrrlis ~;'rk. .. . ..

. .'ttl iC;UUhit A'{lst ;TerI~}J ;.;' 1 as~i'gtlment (IO marks) 1 objective test (20 marks)

Unit B (2nd Term) :.~ . 2 assignments (20 marks) 1 objective test (20 marks)

Unit C (3rd ::r.ern) - 1 exercise (10 marks) 1 objective test (20 marks)

----- --~------""--.--""~-

Page 43: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

41

ENGLISH ,I~. ; Cultural &tudies in Lite.r,ature 2 hours pe~ week

The study of ,pos sible books inc,luding modern novels, plays, poems, and short stories.

Practical work -regular reading aSSignments. ," '

A~.~~~nments and :Essays - one major a.ssignment; class exercises; seminars.

Text Books: Short story anthologies (Hadfield, ·Murdoch, Hemingway) The Old Man and the Sea. ,The. Grapes C?f Wrath. Point, Co~ter Point. Ibsen: Three Plays. Oxford Book of English Verse. Green: Anthology of Australian V~rse~

IVlethod of Assessment - Class exercises, seminars, one essay, and end of yea r examination. ; .:.. ~,

, ' "~

HEALTH EDUCATION II .It "'.

1 hour per we.e~: .

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2 y~a~ -f.rim~ry I'eaclli~g (P.20).

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II : An Extension~f S~condary Physical Education r 2 hour~ .pe,r w~ek; (p. 3.8). !

'.' Planning andprogre~sionin gymnastics'and games less~~s'.· Use of mediCine balls, 'sti'cks~: 'ropes, etc. 'fa blo~d, sport.s... . Progressive games. Training programmes. Weights - circuits. The $portsmaster. Major games: Rugby, Soccer, Basket Ball, Racquet Games. Athletics. Minor or lead upgame's'for major games ..

,SwinHning and life·s·aving. ,:' .,

I ~ , .'

i.:. ' ..

Practical work - practicalapplication ~f major games, etc.

Text Books: , .

Handbook for Swimming Instructors - Department of Physical Sducation.

Reference Books: R. L. S. S. lvlanual 1968 Edition. P. E. Co-op. : Track and Field. Dewitt, R. J. : Teaching Individual and Team Spo,rts. :,<

Alternative Curriculum in P. E. for Secondary Sc:;hools .• , Offic:2.l Rule' BooksofSpbrts cove'red~ ',' ,", ,: :

Method of AsseSSment - Unit method.

SOCIAL ,SCIENCE II 14 hours per week

Part (i) (a) : Commerce - Book-keeping 2 hours per week

Theory, practice of, and. IJl~thods of teaching Trading, Profit and Loss, Balance Sheet; Balance Day adjustments a.nd transfers; : s.pecial cash records; Bank Reconcilitation; Club accounts; control accounts; Ratios; Elementary auditing.

Page 44: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

42

Assignments and Essays - Sh().rtwe.e.klyex~rci$eassigU:inerits.

Text Books: ,,: .J?-:me~:'New Way to Book-keeping, Parts land II.

Reference Books: Yorston, Smith,'Brown : Ace.Qunting Fundamentals •

. :Methodoi Asse'ssment - Progre'ssive evaluation on submitted exercises.

Part (i) (b) : Commerce - De.sc;:riptive Econofllics 3 hours pe r week .. . '. .

This course aims to develop an understanding of sections of the Australian economy. It is expected that the following will be treated in lectures and tutorials:

Government in Australia. The Australian LegalS'Ystern.. .<:.,"::

Ad,vertising and 'W.Larket, Researc:h. Australia's System of Banking. Trade Unions and Wages. Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia. The Nature of lVionetary and Fiscal Policy in Australia. International Trade. " .. ', ,.', ~

Int~rnational Agree~ents. Problems of Australia's Development.

Method of Assessment - A system of progressive evaluation will be followed in this course.

Part (ii) (a) : Geography 3 ,hours per we.ek. :,·:i>. ;,.

This course pursues individua~ st\ldy~nd research in,a va;r.iety of topics in Geography, invol ving frequentcon.s~lt'.~ion with the.lec~:urer.

i\.lethod of Assessment - Progressiv~ evaluation,. ':_,~~,' ,::' '~:. . . }:'_j~~· . .' ... ·.i· 'j "',,'

Part (ii) (b) : Geography Method i 1 hour per week ' I"... (:' ' .. r:: . ~ \:",.J .!.. • .; .' I,.': I, ;: ~.~ -

1. Aims and purposes of Geography in schools.

2. Content and analyses of syllabuses. "

3. Programming - variety and integration through the' forms: .. l!iY'stematic and regiona~ aspects - mapping. ' .• i .. ' '

4. Methods of presenting, consolic1atinga.p:Ci':te~tinggeoJ~raph,.i~~l;information, along traditional,modern and experimental lines. This will include field work. vi sual aids. research arid survey method's.' .. ; ... ' , ",,',!'

Assignments and Essays - Six short assignments embracin;g les,sol). plans, commentaries on demonstrations, assessment of techniques, and one book review (450 words) will be required through the year.

~ '\ ~..,

Refe rence Books: " .. : " . ' UNESCO: A Handbook of Suggestions on the Teaching of Ge()graphy. UNESC.O :Soutce ·B.ook in Geography Teaching. ' GopsUl: The, Teaching of Geography. . I .. ;: ri>" .

. ". ,:; ~ c.n "::, :.". t / :.

", l

Page 45: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

43

Breaultand Shane _:: Geography In and Out of Schools. ChorlEi}, and Haggett: Frontiers in Geography Teaching.

Method~otA:a-:sessment: ~ Students will be progressivel~'-a.ssessed by assignment work and contribution in activities.

-, _ .. _- -.-Fa r-t- (iii-) (a) -:-A sian History 2Yz. hour's per week

.. -"---' 'This study is intended to cater for students with varying academic backgrouilds in history. It aims to develop an understanding of the social, ·cultural, 'e.conomic; ~duc~tional and political problems facing the countries of 'SouthEast Asia by a study6f the history of the area.

This course will have two ,s,t.rands:

(a) A study of Japan,' Indonesia, China. through lectures and tuto~ia.ls .. . :. ." ~,~:. '~ j";' ~ , ..... ',.:' : ~'.. ~, • ::' . '.'

(b) The second, str~pd.~il1 involve individual research on the remaining South East ~,~la,n.<:·o'frit;ies. Students will choose aCQuntry and after general background reading will critically evaluate a feature of the country' s history. - i-'----' This strand is aimed at developing the ability to select, asses~ _,

. and pre-sent'research material.- .

Assignments and Essays - Research assignment (2000 words) due 12th September. ' ' ".' '- '

Method of Assessmen,t (a) tuto:riais', '." :';

- Prog;r~sEli:v~ ,~yal:uation will be based on , :' ,,/ '

(b) cIa s s te s t; c: " . ". >

(c) research studies.

Part (iii) (b) : European History 2Yz. hour s per week

'It' . ,T ••• ·,.!)

No set course is provided but after discussion with the lecturer the student follows a course designed to meet his own needs and interests.

The course is based on reading and research and involves frequent reports to and discussions with the lecturer.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Page 46: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

44

ALLOCA TlONS O,F LECTURE HOURS 'l'O&lJBJECT&

TEACH:Jt"i{is CER'riFICATE" (2 YEAR) - lV~;HEMA;ICS

YEAR I YEAR. II

SUBJECT ' , \ Hrs/wk SUBJECT Hrs/wk

"

Education! 4 Education II English I 2 English II Health Education I 0 Health Educa tion II Iv...athematic s I ,-., 1Q W.1athe:rna.tics II

:'1."' , '

PhySical' Education 1 2 PhySical Education 11 ~ocial' Scienc e I " ' , " 4 Social Science II Demonstrations, I '; . : , 2 Demonstrations 11

" .)" ~'1 ' '

Total , ' I 24 Total " ,

1, , , "

: 1"1 ; " . I .. '~ -. \ .;. • , \ ; i . , '" o'. - .

There ar~ ri~'opti~n subjects.

, , Supplementary and:'qilalify;.ilg- subJcc'ts ,'tut()ri~i~a'rid practice , teaching are as set out under the heading of the Primary Course~' ".,' ' '

",.",

. ~ " . .

, ,

: : , ,.'

;'.

, ,'." i. ~ .' .. ~ ; .

~'; .~. ~. .',. , :

4 2 1

10 2 3 2

24

Page 47: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

45

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED FOR TEACHER'S <:;ERTIFICATE

- 2-YEAR - lVLATHElVLATICS

PART I YEAR r ,"

,,'Et)UCATION'l : :Educational Psycholog{Secondary (a) 4 hours pe r week .

. :.,' .. Re.fer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.4). I '.' ,:", " ",. I :. :': '. '. ' ..,

ENGLISH .1 2 hours per wee~.,

Part (i) : CultU'ral Studies in Literature 1 hour per week

T;he s,tudy qf tAe~iterary forms - novel, poem, play, short story.

Practical w()r~ - regular reading assigrlments.

,Assig~men,ts a,nd Essays - One major essay of 1500 words due in July;, class exercises; at least three seminar papers.

Text Books: S;ho~t ~~ory An~9Jq>gie$." Joseph Andrews. The Old Man and the Sea. The Grapes of Wrath.

," .;",'

Point Counter Point. . Mackaneslf: Anthology of Australian Verse. Shakespeare: Fifteen Plays.

Method of Assessment - Class exercises, seminars, essay, final written examination.

Part (ii) : Oral Expres sion 1 hour per week

'. ,~' ,

,Refer to.Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce- ' (P.36-37). .'

HEALTH"EDUCATION i

Not offered in 1969. :'.:. ;

lVLA THElVlA TICS I lO hour$ per wee~, ' .

Part (i) : Algebra 2 hours per ~eek '

Mathematical Induction. Bin-o,l'Ilial Theor,em. Partial Fractions. Complex NUIrlbers. X/Lattice s .. " i

Determinants. ' . , 'Sequehces' and LiWts • '

" '.'

:,1.

. 'j" ":.'

~. .

Assignments and 'E's'siys' - Weekly tutoria:i e~mple's.

Text Books:

. "

~: .

Weiss, Iv':'. and Dubisch, R. : Higher Algebraiorthe Undergraduate. John ~.7iley.

• :. '.: 1 :. .~.' • '.' .! • : ' . ~ .' , ':'. • ' ".' ,

Method of Assessment - Final exarnination and class tests.

----------.-.--~-....... ---- ------ ...... ---.... ~---- --_ .. _--------

Page 48: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

46

, " .,' Part.' (iU:.,Calculus /, .. ~.; :;.; -' ,i '·':·''"·''--3h6urs'pe·r'-w~ek-'----.. ---'----'

. .

Func tional no t~ tioti~rid:Uzhi t s· of func tion's • Derivatives, their calculation and meaning. . . Exponential, circular, hyperbolic, logarithmic; :inverse, circular and inverse;~yperb()li~ functi~I,ls. The relati,?p,s between these, their derivatives:':' . . Integration and its applications. D.iff~rentiation of implicit functions. Logarithmic differentiation • kethods of inte'gration. Lengths of arcs, areas of surfaces. Centres of mass etc. Power series and Wiac1aurin and Taylor expansions. Logarithmic Series, de l'Hopital's t;h.e,orern,. Use of complex numhe~si~ integratio'n' .. ·· Expansion of Cos nx Sin nx etc.

:.'

/J i, PE~.s ~iJ'st prder,variables separable, linea.r ; homogeneous. Second order with constant coefficients. Particular integra:raridc~mple~en:tary f~n~ti~on.

'~J'Ld:,E'artialdif£el,'entiation. Use for finding'malt; min values' of functions of two variables. '.' " '.";'''' ';\,!:':; ".·i~ ,.' .• ' '.""

Exact differential equations.

ASSignments and Essays - 1 or Z exa.mple.~.;· Weekly tutorial examples. ' " ., '-',

Text Books: Durell and Robson Elementary Calcul~s~' " ' •. Keane and Senior: Complementary Mathe~atics.'

..... ~,.,.\ ... ,": ........ . :i'. ,L~).' 'i. ':' , ;:\~-';.

Reference Books: Thomas: Calculus.

L,'.;-,j} " 'J :.':.

Method of Assessment

Part (iii) : Geometry 3 hours per week

Final examination.

.': ..' i. :'.~ ;.; .

, .

1. Apalytic GE;ometryin Thr.e.e; Dimensions: the geo'metry of point, line and plane, cylinders and spheres.. . ,

Z. Plane Geometry: polar and Cartesian coordinates, :conics~ctions, envelopes.

., " ')'"

3. Vectors: equality, addition, subtraction and ~ultiplication by a scalar. Proof of simple geometric properties by vector metho~s.~:)L :' '. " .

4. Rotation and translation of axes in two dimensions: id~ntification of the gene ral conic.

...• ::., ....... ,. .:; .. ~:~ - .. :.'.~ .~ ...

ASSignments and Essays Weekly tutorialexamples;'"

Text Books: Keane, A. and Senior S.A. : Complementary Mathematics

Reference Books: Bell, R. J. T. : Coordinate Geometry of Three Di~e.t1sf~n,~. Coxeter, H. S. M. : Introduction to Geometry. . . . Somerville, D. M. Y. : Analytical Geometz:y qf~T.h.reeb.imensions.

• ~ : : .. , !. . .):.. .' • ' . .' ;

Method of Assessment - Fin~l examinC!o,ti9tl. . :." " ." :' "x C;'j : . . " ", ' 't :.': '.. :

" ,

Part (iv) : Mathematics Method !.,

:; j ,,;; uL.; •. ~: Z ·hours ·per ';week;-" , ;", .. ':

1. Primary mathematics ba~~groudd of first form pupilS . , ;. ~,: .. : r"; .... ;', .t~') ;: 0 r.::

Page 49: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- 47'

2. Teaching methods - Lesson structure and lesson notes. - Que stioning. - Testing.

3. First form curriculum study.

Assignments {aii'd'E~~aY~\FoU:r assignments~ April. 4th July. 1st August. 19th September .

400 wo,rds, d~e 15th

. \ '

't~~t"ii~6ks; First form mathematic s syllabus and notes.

Reference Books:' Curriculum for Primary Schools - Mathematics.

"Method 'oi(,A.,ssessmeftt '- .Final exa:mination.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I 2 hours per week

., ! ... :. ~ '.

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce (p. 38);,,·;:, .,",' ) \ \!'.\. "

sOcIA.£. 'SCIE:N'CE' I 4 hour's pel-week

,Geography

This course aims to: .'" (a) Give a fundamental knowledge of Geography.

,i ..

(b) Develop an appreciation of methods Qf g,eographic;al study •. , . (c) Provide opportunity for discussion ~f g~ography as it relates to'·

current events. .' . ,.,.

",;1

Opportunity will be provided for students to pursue their own interests . :.in:g~~g.r.:aphical:stud·ies. ':;'.; :' ,,""', ::< " ,;','

ASSignments and Essays -f,~q es!~:ay assignme.nts(l.OOO wordt; ... each) will be required for the year.

~ i I ;.,

Reference Books: . . . '. . • \ , ' ':.~; ," ': .~ "t J. ; :. . '. I

Strahler' Physica'I Geography. Finch and Trewartha : Introduction to Geography. C. S. I. R. O. : The Australian Environment. Jones and Darkenwald : Economic Geography.. .. Thoman, R.S. : The Geography of Economic:Acti~ity.'~ .. ;:

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

,,! ;' ;

'·1;.! : -I: ,:

. \ r·

.. ~ : .: ... '. : '.,' ~ .

'l ", . ~ :: i: . '~'. ~ .

. , .'" " . , . i '''. :

( ; , ! ,~. " " .'.i ~: : i ~ . ",

I ~ 1: .:; , I

,.' ;

• 1 ~ ~

Page 50: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART II

EDUCA TION II 4 hours per week

48

Part (i) : Educational Psychology Secondary (a), .. it:·. \ :.<, ,2,. hc>tul's' 'pet)week '. "'." ';;. ,'.'{.'

Refer to Teacher's Certificat~ - 2-year - Geography/Commerce (p.40).

(p.40).

Part (ii) : Modern Educational Practice (b): ..... 2 hours per w.eek.

Refer to Teacher's CerU#cate - 2-year- GeographylC-ommerce

ENGLISH II :. Cultural Studies in Literature 2 hours per week

.. ' ~ J <"'l j. ,Li' ,~ "; .

" :'Refer' to Tea~her's Ce'rtificate - 2-year Geography/Commerc~)"

(p.41). ASSignments and Essays - Two essays- 1. 1000. words,.due 6th June 2. ·20'00 W()r~8, . due 14th ., ,.

August. Class assignment, 500 words due second term.

Text Books: . <' riC! !;-,' '. ; . :'.\ !:

.A; S is-slte':d lrt'lec ttire·S .. II;

As issued in lectures . . ,;(/(" -~, .• i ,"

Method of Assessment - ASSignments, class work;: annual examination.

I:lEALTH-" EDUCATION ill' ~'H'ealth"Education 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Ptifuary Tea~hi:llg(p. 20).

MA THEMA TICS n 10 hours per week

! ( :

year.

Part (i) :.Algeb.~a. 2 hours 'per week

Matrices Sequences

,'.',/ I

Conver gence of Series Elementary Group Theory Rings, integral domains, fields. Polynomials.

ASSignments and Essays - Weekly tutorial questions.

Text Books:

. \ .~', ~:.i 1: .

Weiss, M. and Dubisch, R. : Higher Algebra for Undergraduate.

Method of Assessment - Final examination and tests throughout the

Part (ii) : Applied lviathematics 1 hour per week

Study of the following topics: Kinematics. lv.£otion of a particle in a horizontal and vertical line under constant and variable acceleration.

Page 51: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

. " -

49

Dynamics of a single particle, systems of particles. Concepts of momentum, impulse, work and energy. Circular motion. Simple Harmonic Motion. Statics.

Assignments iand Essays":';'Weekly tutol'ial exercises.

Text Books: -:;. '

Bullen: An Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics.

Met,llo!;i.oi Asse:ssm.ent - Fit)al examination and class tests •

Part (iii) : Calculus )3~hour.s, per'week

Partial differentiatioh.U se' ih finding maximum, minimum values of a function of two v~riaJ=>-lef,": ...

DE's. The par,ticular integral and thecompl.ementary function. " ;.1: .. '. ",

Total differentials and error theory.

Taylor and :Maclaurin ex;pansions.

Leibnitz theorem on finding derlvatioriS' ot'p'rodu'cts, ..

Series of solutions for DE's.

: \. ~ :

:' ~.. . .

, Expansion of fu~ctions in Fourier se~:i'e~~: \!, .

Double, multiple, repeated inte grals. Improper and infinite integr~ls.

Elementary theory of functions of a compleJC. variable. Beta and Gamma functions.

Laplace trans(QatlS ,anq., tllei,r use. . . .. ' , ~ . ' ',.

I ': .

ASSignments and Essays - Weekly tutorial exercises - 1 or 2 examples.. ,...., ;

Text Books: Durell and: Rdbson Elementary 'CalCulus. Keane and Senior : Complementary Mathematic s.

Reference Books: Thomas : Calculus.

.. l~Iethod' o(A~'sessment - Final examination. • "<.

Part (iv) : Geometry 2 hours: pett :week

Study of the following topics:

.' ~. ,.

Conic: Reduction of Conic. Translations and Rotation of Axes USing· matrix: ·metho'ds.··

. '\ ~ ! ,

Three Dimensional Geometry: .oEqn. of the line in space-symmetric and parametric forms. Eqn. of a plane. Angle betweenb.vo lines, planes, line and plane. Di stance of a point from a plane. Ima ge of a point in a plane.

Three Dimensional Vectors. Unit vectors. Dot and Scalar Products. Vector areas. Volume of parallelepiped. Equation of line, plane. Triple productions.

Solid Geometry: Study of sphere, curves in space. Surfaces of revolution. Ellipsoid, Hyperboloids. Paraboloid. Tangent planes. Quadric Cone.

ASSignments and Essays - Weekly tutorial exercises.

._------)

Page 52: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

50

Text Book~: .,:f3~~~:} ~q~Qr,4in~,~~- q~o,we.ti·yj,(~ Dimensional). "W-eatherburn : Elementary V~F.~~r :Atla1yses ..

Method of Assessment_ ,-; Final examin.ation and class tests. . . ... :. " '. . \ , . .'.: . "'. ' ...

Part (v) : Wlathematic s Method 2 hours per week

Extension of the first year course . Lesson types ,'lesson structure, topic development.

The organization of mathematics courses in Forms 2, 3, and 4.

D~sc~ssion of topics selec.tep from these courses.

School textb!)oks - their use and abuse.

Testing ,..; construction of tests, marking, treatment of 'errors, recording of marks.:: ..

Programming.

Demons~ratiO:lllessons will be arranged to illu8tratea:nd clarify the points ariSing in lectures.

ASSignments and Essays - One aSSignment of 1500 words, due 12th September. ,.!, .

TextBooks: . '~) ;j;-:,

Syllabuses and Notes for Fotlms; I.:.IV.

Referen-cM:Books: . ~::

School textbooks.

Method of Assessment - Final exatininati6n 'and assignment.·

PHYSICAL EDU CATION II : An Extension of PhYSical Education I. 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certit;i,~at~-:, .2.-,yeal." - Qeography/Commerce (p.41). , t ~

SOCIAL SCIENCE IT: Asian Hist~ry 3 hours per week

," ."

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce (p.43),

ASSignments and Essays - Research aSSignments - ~$OO;words -due 27th June and 26th September. Tutorial preparation (lectur·e. time given).

Reference Books: Michael and Taylor: Far East in lvi.odern 'World . . :", ~ ", '. ,) .

Method of Assessment - Pro gressive evaluation based on.: tutGrials! , .. -.:.1

class tests, and research studies.

" . ,,: , .: '.;:; ~~ .r; r.i ·:·,d j":: .. ' :-: ,-'r f "":

".! ' • ; :1 i '.r 'j' :'L

: .. : ~ r.·'

.. '.~" "") . : . .~; ,. ..

. ~. I.: ) : ~ ',',' ~ :.:

- --------

Page 53: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

51

.ALLOCATldNSOF.:.LECTURE HOBRS' TO-SUBJECTS'

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (2 YEAR) - SCIENCE

,

11-'

, '" . ... . ,",

YEAR I YEAR II . , ' .

SUBJECT Hrs/wk . ,.

. SUBJECT Hrs/wk I'

: 1

\ . Education I 4 I Education II English I 2 . English II . ,

\ . Heaith -Educa tion II , ..

Health Education I 1 ~" ._ ......

Physical Education I 1 II Physical Education II Sci~t;lc~.,I 15 I " Scie.nce II Demonstrations I 2 .,1 Demonstration~ II

• :';J i' 'r i

25 . I ,,', Total .,

'Total .. . ,

,-". ~.~ L

" ' . { ~.'

There are no option subjects.

Supplementary and qualifying subjec'ts',' t1,ltoria:Is and practice teaching are as set out under the heading of the Primary Course.

4 2 1 1

15 2

25

Where applicable 'a1ter~ati~etrea:trnent'~ for' certai~ subjects (A & B) are given to provide for students with differing preparation in Science before admission to Col~ege:.

:

Page 54: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

52

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESC.RII3E,D. FOR rEACHER~S, .CERTIlf.ICATE

- 2- YEAR - SCIENCE

PART I YEAR I

p·EDUCATIONI ~" 'EducatiorialPsyehology Secondary "Car -4 hours pe r week

....

Refer to Teacher'.s Certificate - 2-year.- Primary Teaching (p.4)_ .. ....

ENGLISH' 'I 2 hours per week

Part (i) : Cultur.~l Studi~s ~~ Literature 1 hour per\Y~~~ ',;

:: ',' ':".,' .": .j;

The study of the literary forms - novel, poem, play, short story.' ':;

Practical work~" ie~l~r re:~ding assignments.

, Assignments and Essays - One major essay of 1500 words .due in ,July; dass exercises; ~.~ le.C!~tJ:h,ree s~minaJ;'papers. i .. , .... __ ...... __ ~_ .• _ ....... _ •. _, , ... -" ..•. . ~... . ,,, ..

Text Books: Short story anthologies. Joseph Andrews. The Old Man and the Sea •

• ". .' • ',r : :' ~ .' '; I' ':, .,'~' f") ';: ..

The 'Crape's c>f '~j{·~aih •.

Point C~~ter Point. , Mackaness : Anthology of Australian Verse. : Shai~spe~:~e: If:ift~en l?l~ys. . '

. . ..•. ',. .:,.1 .,. ", <.

Method of Assessment - Class exercises; seminars; essay; 'final' :-:,': written examination.

(p.36).

Part (ii) : Oral ExpreSSion 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce

HEALTH EDUCATION I : Child Health

Not offered in 1969.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I : Secondary Physical Education 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce (p.38)_

SCIENCE I 15 hours per week

Part (i) (a) : Biology A 4 hours per week

Introduction: Characteristics of life. Biology in relation to other Sciences.

The Cell: structure, metabolism, mitosis and meiosis.

The Green Flowering Plant: morphology, anatomy, physiology, reproduction.

The Mammal: general features, classification, body systems,

-----------------_._---_ ..

Page 55: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

53

digestive, circulatory, respiratory, excretory,.repJ:'oductive, nervous, . endocrine .

term.

. Animal Tissues.

Heredity, mechanism, chemical basis, heredity in man.

Practical work - at least two hours per week.

Assignments and Essays - Each student to lead a seininar in each

Text Books: Villee : Biolo gy.

Reference Books: Weisz: The Elements of Biology. Foundatio.ns of ~J.odernBio.logy. Swanson, E.G. :Th~ Cell.

. " ~ .' . . . "'.

Method of Assessment'- Progressive at least once per term. Practical examination at end o.f third term. A final examination may be required of any student who does un,satisf~ctory work in.the progressive assessments.

Part (i) (b) : Biology B 4 hours per week

{. '

Alternative Course to Biolo.gy A

1. Introductory: . The early hi~tory of biology. Biology in r~la don t.o .othe ~ b ra~che s'of scienc ~ . Biology in, t~e: schoot ~u+ricul~m. .

• .., . J. •

2. Cell Structure and Iv.' etabolisrri.

3. Organization and phyS'io.logy of: (a) The Ivlammal, (b) The Angiosperm, . " ..

with emphasis on biochemical processes and energy rela'ti:oti.$hi.ps. ' ..

4. Entomology.

testing.

Practical work - two hours per week correlated with theory lectures.

Assignments and Essays - Each student to lead a seminar each term.

Text Books: Villee : Biology. Weisz : The Elements

Reference Books:

',\,.'

of Bio.lo.gy.

Robins, Weier, Stocking.: l;3otany.· , .' . i' " ,,' ; \. > , ~ i "." . '.

Method of Assessment - Assignments, exercises, and periodic

Part (ii) : Chemtstry 4 hours pe r week

. :"

\', l' \

This subject has· the folloviing aims:' . '..' (a) To ensure that students havesufiicient 'understanding of chemistry

to enable them to teach the chemistry section of the· School ,,<;;;ertificate Sciep.fecourse with confi<;lence and \lnderstanding.

(b) To. broaden and deepen the students' understanding of chemistry so as to give them an adequate background for .their teaching and to pro.vide them with 'a' basis' fo.rfurth~r'study;ofthe subject •

. ."' '. ", . ,

1. Revisio.n o.f Chemistry sectio.n o.f Schoo.l Certificate Science.

Page 56: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

54 ---

2. Outline 'of -thehistd:tyof Chemistry., " '.,::"\ .:

3. Historical development of Dalton's Atomic Theory and its implications.

,(,

"" The clas sification of elements.

5. Solutions'. '.

6. Chemical kinetics. "

. ,

7. Equilibrium .

8. Acid-base theory.

9. Atomic structure.

10. Electrochemistry.

Practical work - two hours p~r we,ek •. \l'

Assignments and Essays - Weekly assignmt:mts of chemical calcul-ations, etc. Weekly ~ssi~ents pf.l~b()ra~o;ry.:reports.

Text· Books: " ..... " '" ,- ;,-, Baxter and Steiner ':'ModernChemlstry, Vols I and II. Jaffe, B. : Crucibles, The Story of Chemistry. Schaum: College Chemistry.

Refer~nce Books: Partington, J. R. : General and Inorganic Chemistry. Kemp, B. : Organic Chemistry. lviorrison, R. and Boyd, R. : Organic Chemistry. Allen, J.A.: Energy'CHanges in Chemistry.' '::," ,

, ,'",j.

Sienko, M. and Plane, R. : Chemistry Priru::ipies and' Properties. Chemical Bond Approach: Chemical Systems.

Method of Assessment - Month1y:tests, :finalexamination.and assessment of practical work .

. •..• ,part (i~i),:, Geo~o gy 2 hours per week

Structure of the earth. 'Mineralogy. '

! -.r. ,', .. ,,~~fe,().~s. ,pro~e:sses and petr:ology. Weathering and de.nudation. The processes, Sedimentation and sedimentary petrology. Deformation of the earth's crust. lVetamorphism.

resulting landforms. ',. ~

Structural Geology. , " '.~. '

Practical work will include mineralogy, petroio'gy, wi'th hand specimens, field. work. ,.c. 11"1'-';'" : ... C_ • .' iw" ." .--

• : ';: 1 •

Assignments and Essays - Essay type on -Igneous rocks - 1000 words - due 16th May. , Processes of denudation - 2000 words - due 18th 'July. Sedimentation - 1000 words - due 1 st August. Deformation of the Crust - 1000 w.o;rd.s ~ lSthAugu~t.

Iv+etamorphism -: 1000 words - 3rc;l .9ct~Qe.r. ,

, Text Bo'okEr: :lV.!..cDonnell,Massey, and Tedbutt :' Ertquiring' into the Ea:rth,

~, ' ' • :' ~~ ,j .' I' , 1 : /

,:", .. Reference Books,:" ,', ,,' '. aoimes Principles of P:hysic~l Geology, ~nd E,dip,on. i,' . 'Putnam : Geology ..

.,',

Page 57: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

work.

55 '" ---

Bayly: Introduction to Petrology. . .' Krurnbein and Sloss: Stratigraphy and Sedimentation. Twidale: Geomorphology. Nashar. : Geology of the Hunter Valley.

Method of Assessment - Periodic testing, assignments and practical

Part (iv) : Physics 4 hours pe r week

The physics course is seen as a part of the total education of a teacher. The primary aim is a student c~nfident 'in himself a~ a teacher in all three fields, cognitive, effective and psychomotor , leading to enthusiasm for his task,' ai#a.ys prbv'idlrlg that th~ cbnfidence is justified~

The student requires a thorough grasp of all concepts involved in school physics and the ability to make our various models acceptable to the pupils' understanding .. klealso needs a sufficient grounding for further study and for coping with special interests of individual pupils.

') ':' 1 .

The genera,l.aims above will dictate the content to be ·coveredin;the course. Vi e do not know what content our teachers will be teaching in ten years time •

. .. ' The w:q~k w.ill pe based on the text 'Modern University Physics', Richards,. et al. and. will be at the standard of that text.

'I" ," .),:,:: '.' •

Work will'be takeni'rt>inchapters 1-12 and 19-30 namely: cO : ,)v.ie~p.an.ics under. su<:hheadings as..,

Rectilinear motion Circular motion Wave motion

Electricity under such headings as -Electrostatics Direct current electricity N;.agnetic fields Magnetism and electricity Electromagnetic radiation.

Practical work - There will be two hours' practical work per week related to the topics being studied at the time.

Assignments and Essays - The students are expected to work for four hours each week to be divided as follows -One hour completing practical records, Two hours spent on work being studied at the time leading to periodic tests and problems to be collected. One hour on general reading of aspects of modern phYSics.

Text Books: Richards, Sears, Wehr and Zemansky : Modern University Physics •. Martin and Connor: Ba.sic Physics, Vols 1, II, III. Butler and Messel eds, : Space and the Atom.

Reference Books: Halliday and Resnick: PhYSics. Ference, Lemon and Stephenson: Analytical Experimental Physics. Freier: University Physics. Messel ed. : Senior Science for High School Students, Part 1. Kricker and Butler: Advanced PhYSics.

Method of Assessment - Periodic tests, problems and a final examination. Practical work to be assessed throughout the year.

Page 58: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

. ':' '"

56 '" ---

Part (v) : Science Method:' I hO\lrper week <

The following topic s shall be~, d~~:Gu~sed: Clas s control.

<, l?:u pi:l,in.volvernent . ,'.; i Planning of lessons. Questioning.

;' ,:

Demonstration of experiments. Organization of practical lessons. Safety in the laboratory. Objectives for, scie~cre. teaching. Scientific method. " .. .

~, ~ .. "', i

Teachltig Science as thought r~thei:. than subject matter,. Integration and correlation.'·· .

'Unit planning. .• ' . '. Eva.luation. ,Modern approaches to' syllabus :construction •

Reference Books:

, .' f' t! '

.! .

Late:Y',A.L~ : Guide to Science Teachiri'g in Se~bridary Shhools.,! Thurber and .Coll:ette !'Teaching Science in Todkiy's 'Secondary>Schdols. U. N. E. S. C. O. : Sourcebook. for Science Teachers.· . " .:. ',' ,.". ': x::, r",' ~'.: ; .... , ," , ':. .. ",.. ",:,' , ' , ' .

Method of Assessment - Assessment shall be on assignments done throughout the year.

. . '.~. )" -: '.'

'j" ; }

. "" , f.~}

, "t

. "

". :

-:.' .

."( : ... :

t., '. i

\ ,:' ;.\ : ,r ..

Page 59: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

57

PART II YEAR II

EDUCA TION II 4 hours per week

Part (i) : Educational Psychology Secondary (a) 2 hours per week

,;' '·Refer·tb;T~a.c·he·r's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce . (pAO).

Part (ii) : Mode,rn Educational Practice 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce' (p. 40).

ENGLISH II : Cultural Studies in Literature 2 hours per week

Refer t'o Teache'r's Certificate - 2-year ~Geography/Commerce' (p.4l).

A'ssighrnents arid Essays - Two essays - 1. iooo words' due 6th J~ne. 2.2000 ~ord~ d\le 14th August.

(;,lii\s,sassignment,' SOp wQrds, due second term., '

" . "MethodoLAssessment - Assignments, class work, and annual examina tion. : ,

HEALTH EDUCATION II Health Education 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate- 2-year -' Primary Teaching. (p.20) •

:' !'

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II An Extension of Se~ondarYPhysica{Education I 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2:-year - Geography/Commerce (p.4l) •

SCIENCE II 15 hours per week

Part (i) (a) : Biology A 4 hours per week

, ... :

The second year of a two year course designed to provide content and background for teaching the biology strand of the ,science syllabus for the School- Certificate. ' ,:"

Further study, through lectures, practical work and, set reading, of the following topics:

The Green Plant: Nutrition, co-ordination. The Animal: Co-ordination and respon~e; movement; reproduction. Cell Metabolism. Genetics. Ecology.

Practical work ~ Two hours per week + selected field exercises.

ASSignments and Essays':' One maior written aSSignment (approx. 2000 words) due August~ Short weekly exercises on theoreti~al and pra.c'tic~l presentation of selected topics.

Page 60: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

58

Text Books: Villee : Biology. Odum : Fundamentalsof Ecolo gy.

Reference Books:

Weisz: The SE~r:lJ~,~~:;t?~~~~?~.og¥ .. ,:,.'.) Robbins, Weier and Stocking: Botany." Additional references for particular topics will be given during course .

. ". . \', ';;" ., I ",;."''- . .. . .

lv.lethod of Assessment - Assignments, exercises and periodic testing.

Part (i) (b) : Biology B,. - , Alternative to Biology A. 4 hours per week

1 • The, Me'chani smof Heredity.

z. Diversity of Living Organisms. The JVlOdern View of Evolution. Adaptation as an Outcorne:~r Evolut'ion.'"

3. Ecolog~cal principlesCLnd their applic~tion to some local habitat ; studies>' ';'.- ...,'. " .

4. Teac::hing Metb,04. Practical work, materials, aids and references sU:itabl~(fo~ U:~e in secotidaty Classes.'" .

,.: • .~' t .: ' :",' .~ .

Practical work - Two ,hours 'per week'correlated witlil.,theorY"'lecrures..

: AssignmentiS am:i:Esisays-:,On-e<major w'ritten assignment :(approx. 2000 words) due in August. Short weekly exercises in theoretical and, ' .. ' practical presentation of selected topics.

Text Books: Villee : Biology •

. W~iAA'~:lTh.:e El~~nts of Biology. ,',;." Odum : Fundamentals of Ecology.

Reference Books: .~':);.' . ~R-O~i~s~:Weier:rStocking::· Botarly.

Swinott, Dunn, Dobbansky : Genetics.

" lVlethod 'of Assessment - By assigrime~t and peri'odic testirig~

Part (ii) : Chemistry 4 hours per week

Bonding, Structure and Periodicity. Chemical Equilibrium. Electrochemistry •

. Energy Changes in Chemistry •. Elementary Organic, Chemistry,~ . ' , ' Historical Approach to Atomic Molecular Theory.

It, ("

Practical work - Two hours ~ r we,ek of prat:tic~lwork, related to the topics listed above.

Text Books: "'J[j:)'Sc'hauin~ D. and Roseberg, J. L.

Reference Books: Allen. J.A. : Energy Changes in Chemistry. University of New South Wales: Approach to Chemistry Sel:'ies.

:' , .'";' " : <" • ~ .: • .'. •••• , , .'.' • • : • • • • • "

,'; .

Method of Assessment - Study guides shall be iss~~d ~l:l,ro\lghout the yeal".' Tests, of 6ne ho~r'du~ation each, shall b~ base'd~~ the s~c;lY gu'ide s.·· Thre~ te at s shall b~ gi veh In; 'ea.~n 'term'.," ' " '-: ;,' ' "', , ,.,. j~" .' , •. 0,;,

\---------------- ------------------ -_ .. -------_ ...... -_._--------_._-----------'

Page 61: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

59

, Part (iii), ,: Geology, 2 hours p'er week

Sediznen ta tion and sediznenta. rype trolo gy . lv.l.etaznorphisrn. General palaeontology. Deforznation of the earth' s crust. lv'lapping. Econoznic geology. - o~e zninerals and their deposition; coal, petroleum. , " Stratigraphy an:dgeological history.';' Geology of the ocean basins.

Practical work will include petrology, palaeontology, znapping, econoznic znineralogy, and field work., . ..,' .: .' , .' .

Assignznents and Essays - Essay-forzn, 1000 words, on sediznentatton,,' due 4th', April. znetaznorphiszn, due 15th May. deforznation ,of earth's cJ:"ust,due 27th June. a geological hist~ry;'due 10th October. Throughou't ju'ly, znapping assignznents, up to two hours per week.

Text Books: McDonnell, lv.i.assey, and Tebbutt : Enquiring into the Earth.

Refe rencei3'ooks: Keunan : Marine Geology. Holmes : Physical Geology. Putnazn : Geology. Bayly: Introduction to Petrology. B rouwe,r: General Pa'laeontolo gy. Stokes :. Essentials of Earth History. Bateman: The Forznation.()i,:rv.i~neralDeposits.

i···· .

Brown, Caznpbell and Crook: Geological Evolution Of Australia.

Method of Assessznent - Perio9,ip- .testing, assignments,' practical and field work. "J';

Part (iv) : PhYSics 4 hours pe,r week

:::", :,;.l'> " ' ' , ", ' ' , T,h~ ~~ner,al aims will be a continuation ,vii,those specified under

Science l:Phy~ics (p. 55). , I ,.' • .. '. :;' ~ -.: ~') : ; , '. \ ":'" j ,

The work will be based on the text Modern Unive'rsity Physics, Richards et al and will be at the standard of that text.

such as: Work will be taken from chapters 13':18 and 31-45 namely; topics

Sound. Hydro'static S.

Te~~eratu~~,. " Work and heat. The ideal gas .' Nature of light. Reflection. Refraction. Interference and diffraction of light. Polarization. Relativity. Waves and corpuscles. Nuclear ener gy.

" ';

~~~~---------.~---.----

Page 62: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

Assignments and Essays - The students are expecte-dto work for four hours each week to be divided as follows: One hour completing practical records. Two hours spent on work being studied at the time leading to periodic tests and problems to be collected. One hour in general reading of aspects of modern physics.

Text Books: . " ,Rc~hrd's.,Sears; Wehr and Zemansky : Modern University Physics.

Martin and Connor: Basic Physics Vols I, II, III. Butler and Messe1 Eds : Space and the Atom.

Reference Books: H~llid,ay and Resnick .: Physics. . . Ference, Lemon and Stephenson: Analytical Experimental Physics. Freier: University Physics. . Mess'elEd. : Senio~ Sdence for High School Stud.ents Part I. Kricker and Butler: Advanced Physics.

Method of Assessment·- Periodic tests, problem.s and a final examination. Practical work to be assessed throughout the year~

Part (v) : Science Method 1 hour per week . :,.:,

The Second year of a two year course comprising one lecture per week together with attendance at demonstrations as Cl.rrangedat.Jocal secondary schools. " .

The course will include: ; t"··

1. A continued study of the general.p:r,i~ciples of science teaching and of teaching techniques particularly ~pplicable to science.

2. A survey of the .current science syllabuses for FormS' I-tV .. ConstJ;Uction of programmes.

3. ~<;atering for extr,emes of ability iIi scienc'e: tlie slow learner; the ' •. ;., outstanding pupil.

ASSignments and Essays -Term I - Two essay type approx. 1000 words - due 7th and 11th weeks of term. Term II - One essay 1000-1500 wordS, due August. Short class exercises. Term IlI.-One essay-type assignment - 1000 worcis- due 1st week in October.

Students will also be required to write brief reports on demonstration lessons.

Text Books: No set text. A number of references will be. used as below.

Reference Books: Students are provided with copies of the syllabuses arid notes.

lIliultiple copies of relevant reference books are available in the library and detailed references to these will be given during thetourse.

Method of Assessment - By assignment and pe.rfo-rmancein class exercises.

Page 63: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

61

,ALLOCA'rION$. OF LECTURE .HQURS TO SUBJECTS

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (3 YEAR). -. HOME SCIENCE/TEXTILES

YEAR I 11 YEAR II . YEAR III'

SU:aJECT, Hrs/wk:! , SUBJECT . Hrs/wki SUBJECT Hrs/wk .. .~ , ~ ) .. ' . , ., .' , . .. ':1 '.' J' ; ii ,I I : i

Crafts I ;

1 i I iI i I I " i , I ,; ;

Education I i 3 : Education II 3 IIEducation III ' , 3 English I '. . j lEnglish II

!

3, I 3 IEnglish III . . I 0 Health Education I

I 0 IHealth Education II I 1 ,Health Education III i 1

I

IHome Sc/TextilesII ,14 Home Sc/Textiles I :16 IHome Sc / Textile s III 116 Physical Education I I. 2 I Ph ys ical E duca tion II I 1 I PhySical Education mil Demonstrations J' I '.1.: 2 . 'I!Demonst:ations J II' 1 2 . Demonstrations J III I 2 • " I. Observatlon's" . :", I~ " liObservations i J Observations

I ., ! I'

J ... ,

II ! , , ,,,

26 !24 Total Ii . Tota,l 1 .Total L 23 '" ... ',i i L

There are no option subjects,'

Supplemelltarya~d, qualifying subjec,t~,,, t\ltorialsand practice teaching are ass~~ ou~un:~er ~herh~adin.gof the ,Primary Teaching Course with theadciiti.o,nalr,eq\lireme1'l:t that Home Practicejandlwo periods of practice te~ching, each of three weeks' duration,a]!'e included in the Year III programme.

:'

',t ,"

• l. • ,) :.1 : .

.r, ;\

. ' .. '

• ' . .:'->; ;. '

1 I

I

Page 64: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- 62

DETAILS QF.~SUBJECTS PRESCRI13 ED FOR .. TEACHER'S'·'CERTIFICATE

·~.(..>3,..Y.EAR.- '. HOMF;.~~NCJi;/TE.XTlLES:·::

PART I YEAR I

. GRAFT 'T" :,'f't;'';:ching'i\ids 1 hour per {i,~~k'

. ;, , . . .,. " , .".i ~, . " ,;

". '.' : Students will be made 'aware of and given instruction in the construct-ion.and/or operation of the various classroom aids, duplicating aids and audio-visual aids.

Whilst instruction will be given in the operation and maintenance Of all mechanical~:ids,· emphasis in the course will be placed upon their use .in th~ classroom situation. . .

(a) Classroom Aids. . , .:,./ c' . . . .... •

The Chalkb'oard as a T4eachingAid :-:writing and drawillgon the chalkboard, planning chalkboard layout, colour and shading for 3D effect •. Charts and Chart Construction:.. function of charts, storagEl and display, aids in chart construction, enlargement and redu'ction

...... .. ofdrawings;·· 'reproductionoi drawiii'gs.' ., The Construction and Inter.pretation of Graphs - planning graph layout, lettering, scale, Cl"OSS hatc~.ing8:ll:d shading.

(b) Duplicating Material. Opel;'ation,.: mairiten~nceand functioilas 'teachifig aids of the foJlowing methods of producing rriultiplecopi:es' of material.

,~.,.Stu;d.ents will;prepare master sheets, stenCils for the:spfHt .. , duplica·tor -and ink ,duplicator • '

Hektograph Pad and Spirit Duplicator. Ink Duplicator and Stencil Scanning Machine. Photocell and Head lliplicators. Offset printing machines.

(c) Audio- Visual Aids. The Slide and Strip Film Projector - construction and use of daylight screens, positing of projector and screen in classroom. Storage and indexing offilms and slides. The Overhead Projector - operating instructions ,_ preparation of traneparencies and projection of samples.

j"\ >

The Motion Picture Projector - care, storage, splicing, rewinding of films. The operation of the projector. The Tape Recorder - function of the recorder as a teaching aid. Radio and Television - their impact on modern teaching techniques. Closed circuit television.

ASSignments and Essays -

(b) graph due during (a) chart I

second term (c) master sheets and stencils for duplication (d) an essay of approx. 800-1000 words - due 4th week of third term.

Reference Books: Finn, James D. : The Audio-Visual Equipment Manual.' Schultz, Morton : The Teacher and the Overhead Projector. Kemp, Jerrald E. : Planning and Producing Audio-Visual lV.taterials.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Page 65: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

EDUCA TION I : Educational Psychology Seconda.·ry.(b) 3 hours per week

.I.i.efert(»,T.eache~'s Certificate- ;,;. 2-yeat j..'Prirhary Teaching (p.4). ,.1: ..

•.... , 8'., "',The same gerie:taJ areas will be treated~ though not to.the.same. 'd~pth~'" "

EN,GLISHt. 2 hours per week

. Part .Ul :. G.ultural:Studies in LiteratU:re , 1 .~p'ij;r. per w¢ek' "

:: "

R~fer' to T'e'acher' sCertific;at~ -' 2~ye~'r -' Geography/Commerc.E:l;. (p. 36).

'. /" . i'~ 'A's~ignrrlents arid Essays - 'Es~ay 1200 words, due 2nd JW1e.:,'·

Essay lOO;O'~<):i:ds ~ du~':8th S~:iptember:" . . ... ;,

Method of Assessment - Assignments and writtenexamina:ti0It~ ~. ! '

Part (ii).; O:rC!-l' EKpression 1 hOll(r Per~/week

: \,1 '.

i.· "'

Refer' to ;Teach~ri)s Certific'ate -' 2-year - Geogra:phy/Commerce (p.36).

HEALTH EDUCATION I

Not offered in 1969.

HOME SCIENCE/TEXTILES I 16 hours per week

;.:

Part (i) : Basic. Science 3 hours per week

C"" A.!c::oUT<s~.i:n Physics and Chemistry which will giv'e an adequate

~:. ,:

background in the scientific prinCiples specifically applied in courses in Home Science .and, T e~ti1es • . ".' . .' .!

. , .. ";. i

Topics will include: c,'

(a) Scientific measurement. . ... , . " .n.' __ ,., . .'. . .• . '."- ,

(b) El'errierit s J pe rio <;1icity , pe.riod,ic t~ble •. (c) Atomic structure; che~ical bondin·g. ; ... (d) Electricity. Electrochemistry. .. .-

.. (e) ),viQtion.: .. . ,j;o

(f) Solutions: definitions, types i process; properties~ (g) Organic chemistry. (h) Polymer and colloid chemistry. .. :'.::: ':. '.' .:,.1 ,,' ,", . '.:' =,' ,\" .". ' , J " :". i 0'

Fra~tical work ~ •. E!xperime'htal.in~estigation"Win playa majOI' role in this course as a basisforfobnulating ,and te:stin'gth'eoretica:l 'con~ep.t8..

. Assigrime:nt~; ci~dE~:~~Ys' - Fiv~' short proble~s .w,iU besJe:t ,eacl:l:week to test stud~nts' ~ uhtle'r's'tan4iqgof, llasic principle~ ancttheir, ~;ppli<;:~ti9n ~9 concrete situations' founC:1. ini;iQrn~ Scien.G~. i(i~ ,e~pe.cted that ap'prQ~~~at~lY

'I "''', " • ~ • !, '. 1 ,; ."", ". .' ,~ '.' •

thirty experiments : {ofte'ri in c()ujunction :with~Q:t:k .~n'fl,orne Sc~enceLwUl.,be carried out dur'in.g the year. :Students willp~. ex,peFt,~~ to cQmple~e infe~ences for each. ,,". , ;.( ,;. , .. !'.I ' .. , .... -

. l '_.1 ~:-. ;.! .

',; .R~:derence ,Books: :. :; .:

Supplied as required .. ··

i\iethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation .. '.' ,.

;:.;

(/i,,',f:' ......

Page 66: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

Part (ii) : Iiome·.5c:ience 3 hours per weel{ ,

64

: " Acouts~,desi.gned to integrate a scientific understandin-g of how food substances . rea~t (reference to be made to the relevant topics in Physic. and Che'liistry)with'the'~pplica:tion of this understanding to the actual preparation of food for the family.

A study of nutritional chemistry will be made in the conteJet of the, foods investigated.

Practical work - ExperiIIlentaLinvestigation of the reactions of food substances and their effect upon nutritiona.l. value and food preparation. Application of experimental findings in preparation, cooking and serving of food.~' - ' ". .

ASSignments and Essays - An assignment of apprpximately five pages wiU:be set ohead~of fivetopicsduriilg the y~ar.·The topicsto be, covered are: World ,Food, Problem .. Food 'Production '

-.due 11th April - due 30th June

Food Freparation (Experimental)- due 4th August ?vHcrobiolo gy of Foods - due 3rd, October Diets and dietary patterns for various group 1>, ':" du~, 20thOctobe;r •

" 'j " Ct, "-, -, ~ .) \. .: ri: ... r .r .. ·.'· ;.' ~. .',.' . . .', 1.".: ... ~. '. '....

Reference Books: f"' ,

Supplied as required

IV,.ethod of Assessment -. Progressive evaluation.

Part (iii) : Junior HOUle Science l'iJ.ethod 2 hours per week

',. ,!

A study of school organization and routine will be made within the contexts of theoretical concepts and the school situation.

Topics will include: (aliT,he, .place of, Hotne. $cience within the school and the part it should

", :, ,p'~~¥- ~r;lthe; tc;>ta1.lS.chopl organization. "(b) vi ritten and practical preparation for lessonpresentatioh.

(c) Understa.nding the school syllabuses •. (d) Teaching methods. , (e) Problems of the practical lesson in schools - :ir:ttegra:tedwith

practical College work 'vihe'r e p·ossib1e. (f) Demonstrations.,i',:""

',.: "

Practical work - Teaching aids relevant to school syllabuses. Practical Cook~.r.y>.:Hon+e Management and LCLundry .topics. ".

ASSignments and Essays -1. A short essay of 2-3 pages on the effects and relevance of changes in

Jhe s()ciaJ" technologica~ and economic patterns upon Home Science . ¥4P:f~"t.~!?nA~Jp.J!;' ,se~p:qdary s q1wols: -due 12th rv.i:a y •

2. Devising a unit of work, USing one of the subject a~e,as of the syllabus -Horne':SCieriice 'oi-Craft - 'and makin'g use. of the pr~ndples learneq c'on:cernil1g~,cui'ricu1uhi ~ortstruction- due 11 th A~gt~:st. . ..,.,

3. Inc1ass,,'ciuring secbnd'term, practice will be gciin~d, in carrying out, technique 5 fOreffectivetea,t-hirig of se gments of the Syli~busfor, 1 st ",' to 4th Form (everyshitleritindividually on different dates). .

4. Observations will be made and recorded during practice teaching of procedures in school or ganization of importanceih'.teaching.f:i:'om 1 st to 4th Forms (due at beginning of 2nd year).

Text 300ks: ",,') School Syllab'uses in Home Science Forms II to IV and Craft for Girls.

Page 67: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

65

",Refe,l"enc~, ~pok$,:

" Supplied as required. \ f· '

,F' : ,Method'of,Assessmeht - Progressive evaluation;

Pacrt (iv): JU,tl,Qr, ,NeedlewQrk Method 6 hours per week (1 Term.)

Se~tion,A - Teaching Se~ondary Needlework. l.a:rief d~scussion on re,quil"ement~ of the Primary School. 2. ivl~th04 of teaching and testing ,~he use of the sewing machine. 3:"Prepaiation and ~onstl"uctiQn pf lesson notes. 4. Simple 'st\1dy 9f,£abricsa$th~:y would be treated with aids made for

1st Form Craft. 5. Method of teaching processes and stitchery accorc;1ing to ,syllabus

requirements. "I,

Section B ~ Practical Needlework." , ' ',' ,',' , i, " C', ,:> F' ,'E ~ ~ ~ :. j'~' ,';'~.. :" ',r,' . . .~ .' . ::,' .: ~ . ' . ." .. ,.' ". ,"

1. Compilat'ion of a method book involving proces!ianq., stitches with variations according to the syllabus.

2. Construction of te,aching aids for demonstra,tion purpos,es. 3. Construction of Articles and Garments suitable for"l,stF,orm Craft

Classes. 4. Sample stitches suitable for wool embroidery. ~ .. ',

"'i Assignm~l1.~s and Essays - Practical Needlework dur.ingl st,Term.

Text Books: " . ,'Gough,E. L.G.:Pl"bcesses in Dressmaking.

Knox, L. : Textiles for the Consumer. Giles, R. P. : Needlework Fabrics.

Reference Books: ' , " "'" Anchor : Man'Ualoi Needlework. Curriculum for Primary Schools - Art and' Craft. Selection of Art Needlework Embroidery Books.,

,f "

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation:~·'1 ,

Part (v) : Supplementa~y Science 2 hours pe r week

'w_" ... , ..... ---.-p .. ~-" .. This subject has the following aims:

'l'lf· :..

.'.t .. ~

. . ,.~ ' .. "

) , ,

, " .. ,." .. \. ~ ; ,

1. To provide some relevant science background knowledge ,for tP9se. students whose secondary education did not include courses in senior science andlorhome science' atid/or;t~xtile,s'. ,: • :)CI"

; ;., .~

2. To give experience in the scientific approach to expe:r:imen~CIJ:~,~tuations -hypothesis formation, experimental design, drawing ,valid conclusions, etc. ' ',:,", , " :, J) L; ,i':' , .. i""

3. To provide and design simple experiments useful fQ~ clarifying,l;>::r<;>ad scientific themes. ;.:':: ',j"). J

4. To examine critically some important ideas, .cop'c~,pts, anA techniques in modern science.

5. To treat aspects of measurement in science. ,~. I :'.,

6. To treat elementary stoicheiometry. 7. To investigate selected everyday scientific phenomena.

Practical work - Laboratory exercises will be given to complement the material covered in lectures.

ASSignments and Essays -1. Each student will keep a bound foolscap book in which a record of all

work will be kept (stencilled material, notes, answers to questions, experimental results, etc.) This will be checked periodically

---,-----,--------------

Page 68: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

66

and handed in for final assessment during the week prior to' the annual examina tion s.

2. Question sheets issued for each topic (approximately one per fortnight).

Reference Books: Appropriate reference books wilLlbe.1i~tied for ·thevarious topics as the course proceeds.

Method of Assessment - Periodic assessment on the basis of three' term tests, with thes.ubmission of the above-mentioned Reference Book '(see ." .") ,

~ssignments) .c;ountip.;g, 250/0Qf the final assessment. There will not be a final examination in this subject, t~ough students ailing to meet a satisfactory .standard .. inth~;ye~J:'rs 'Work may be req\1ired to sit for a final examination.

Pa.~t (vi).,:. Textiles 4 hours per week (2 Terms)

This course involves the integration of the following strands of .J.~xt;ile. study and.~pplji~~tism,;. " '. i .. Textile Arts (a) clothing,

2. Design.

. (R·l; @mQroi~e ry, . ·(c Lfurnishings.

3. Textile Science.

. .:P,racticalwo:rl~-i .Expe·rimental investigation of the reactions of textile substances and the application of these reactions in textile a.rts ,and design. Practical clothing construction, embroidery and furnishing exercises which will give a broad understanding and knowledge a~ci'encourage creative ability. . . "

Assignments and Essays - Laboratory reports to be, presented on completion of each set of experiments. Examples, usually a completed article, of practical exercises.

;1. . ' , .' . ~

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

PHYSICAL EDUCA TION I : Secondary School Games 1 hour per week

Mino;r Game;s.

Major GaInes - S~£tba.ll, Squash, Tennis, Hockey, Netball.

:U)npires~ ··T,ests~ :,

SWiniiningand Lif~Saving •.

. : Reference Books: Life Saving Manual. Ru.l.~ J~ooks. of. .Ciame s •

Method of Assessment - Unit tests .•

. ':: ;:1'"3:

. '. '.';' '.' ,,::.r: .. ;

~ .:'",. .. .: ,,' "; ,", ,',);. . ," ,,, 'X . , ~

~:. ',;"", , . , \ :., "

..

Page 69: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

68

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

Method of AssesSment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (ii) : Horpe5cience : 3 hours per week

." ••. ' .A'~O:Ul'~;e'ide~igned to integrate a scientific understanding of how food substances react, with the application of this understanding to actual preparation of food for the family.

A study of nutritional chemistry and an extension of this knowledge in a study of nutritional problems in Australia and overseas will be made.

, ~ Soirte'~~search willb~ conducted in regcLrd to foodstuffs commonly 'e~:teiirin other'conntrles, especially developing countries. Food will ,be pre­pared using recipes from countries such as Indonesia, Philippines, New Guinea, Tanzania. Authentic methods of cooking and serving will be fol~owed wherever practicable. Any parallelbet:ween type of food eaten andthe:--,' nutritional status of the nation will be considered.

I < , ' -: PracticaJ work - Preparation of equipment required in experimental design. Experimental investigation of reactions of food substances and the ,e#ectuponnutritional value and food preparation. Application of experimental findings in preparation, cooking, and serving of food.

Assignments and Essays - Laboratory reports to be presented on completion of each set of experiments. Reports of the praCtical application based on own evaluation, and evaluation by section members of dishes cooked.

Text Books: The Chemistry of Nutrition and Food Processing.

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

Method~:t As~'essment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (iii) : Junior Home S~ience Method

2 hours per week.. '. '.

A ;'~tudy' 0(s~h6bl organi~'ati~n' ~nd ~~'i;.tine will be made within the contexts of theoretical concepts and the schoo~ sit~ation.

Topics will include: (a) The place of Home Science within the school and the part it can

play in the total school organization. (b) The efficient organization of a Home Science unit.

: ,,(c')/Aids t.O ef£icien'cy in organization. (d) Cookeny"schoalaccoutits.' (e) Syllabus interpretai.tion and .progra:n1:ming. ' j

(f) Problems of the practical lesson in sC,~901$ ~ integrated where poss.ible with Colleg~ wor~. .' , "j"' i."' i ", . . . , :':.". .' ! ~

",~practic'alwork - Teaching aids 'relevant·to school syllabuses - for lesson presentation and increaSing the efficiency when organizing a Home Science unit. Practical Cookery, Hotne<Management, and LaUndry topics.

Assigri.men:t~ and Essays- Reports on 'observations of school organization,-to be used as suitable. reference material if appointment is ,to either a staffed Home Science unit or to manage the unit alone~'

TextBooks: School Syllabuses in Home Science and Craft for Girls.

Page 70: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART II YEAR II I

EDUCATION II 3 hours per week

; ,: " ;' .:. • > :.'" :.~. :.',

Part (i) : Educational Psychology Secondaryi(a) 2 hou:cs per week '-'

.,1:-'. )"t Refer .to T~a.c.her'sCer:ti£icate ""f.2~year - Geography/'Conlmerce i Jp.40) •. . .' . I

Part (ii) : Modern Educational Practice Ihdur' per week' ! ... 1

Topics will be selected from those indicated in Ed.ucation II : Modern Educ~tiori.al Practice (b) Te~C:h~fi'sc~rtihca.te -2-year ~ Geogra,phy/ Commerb~'(p.40}. ,: . - ',": I... .

. ',,,' .:'; ~ . ::) .'J ;:~ \ '. .' .. ;' ;': ..

",; .. ,"

. !. ..

:.:' ,

The otuciy of prescribed bOQks including D;lod~:r~ poy~ls,plays, short a.torie·s;'· . ," ..:~-'"'.':', ". ,Ii, ;(t':: . ';'\":: .. ' .. ' .'. . ':', 'j ," " .... . .' .

.., \ ;';"'1' .~": ,~i j i' ~.: . ) . (, " ~." r.r. (: :" i · ... l ."

\'G}fl:' ((:: -, :~s s.~g:r.;m.ep. ts·r}.J;ld E.f1 ~ay,s·, -.:Threeshort (500 .. 7 5.0 words ) a SSign.ments due late second and thir~:.te-rr:b,s. : r". .'

,Text. Books: , ,,:, ,'. .

. ,~he.rid~Tl;:Tp.e ;Riv~.ls. ,'" ,: f

: .. Wil<ilel,.::·Tl,l~-,imP9rtance ·of ,'Being E:arnest. Hemingway: The Old Man and the Sea. Hadfield: Model°n. Snglish Short Stories. Murdoch : Au straHan Short Storie s • . , ." :~ " '

Reference Books: To be given in lecture s.

Method of Assessment- Assignments ,and final examinatio.n. ~,' . ~'"t ,:',' ; .. '.t ,'; 1 '; r.':'" ",. _. ~ . ~ i. -' .' .

HEALTH EDUCATION II : Health Education 1 hour per week

'~.: ..

Refer to Teachej;"s Certificate - 2-year - PriIll~ry Teaching (p.20). . : .. \':~. ") ;? ..

, , ,.~

HOME SCIENCE/TEXTILES Ii': 14 hours per week

Part (i)' :'BasicSden~:e:: 3 hours per week

~ ; , .,' i • I • ( ", . .

.,":-'

·t. ',:1

A course which will giv~. anadequateba'ckgl'oti'nd in the; sdientific disciplines of Biology, Biochemistry and Biophysics for:'appHcatioti·in the relevant strands of the H~:Scj.enc:e.a;nd· l'extile'SI'Course.·' ·,l;~. ' .

• -, ... ," "\ _ r.,::; L, I". ~ ,., 'J ," (4" '" . '-,. , .: ."" f/.l : ,:' "', , .... :.I!~!.' q .' .' .,.> .' Topics' \vl11 In dude:. _' ...

(a) The biological and biochen'l:ical th~or'ies of behav'iour.

..

-1- _(b}I,w:Q.Wrpn:m.ent;:in ;~lationtQi homeostasis ofo'rganism, tissues and ':)(;.":(: .. 1",;: !·~.~·~.t·$;~.d.f.;'~:~·:\ ""j}'!', I .1!~ .,'.:-: ..... ~, r:.',

" :-:'i" .(~), ~el~ti<:»:~·:Qf /;j~r:uc,t;t.;).X'f#;tP the biochemistry o£:the t·ell • .. (d) Biochemical and biophysical ,nature,9£~~1l metabo~sro~

"',:'. ,:.';" ;.c, " ;~. ~":::'.:~:,';,'~~""''''': "~,' (. ~~j, ~·.:I:J /i. - C -: .«L .. ~ ,..... '; .... "

. . Practic;;~Lw,Qr,k I""' ,E,xperimental-inv.e,stligatioft :W;ill play,amajor' . " role in this qlUr.S:e a~.(\ b~!>is.fo,r formulating and;te;sting,thebretic'alconeepts.

ASSignments and Essays - Laboratory reports to:bepres·ented at completion of ei3,cp.set,Qf ~;s:pedment~,.::' :,::::, l<!C;' i:,: ., ':""'. ".: ,-' I,

Page 71: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

68

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (ii) : Home. Science : 3 hours per week

,A,~():\1r'~,e'lde~igned to integrate a scientific understanding of how food substances react, with the application of this understanding to actual preparation of food for the family.

A study of nutritional chemistry and an extension. of this knowledge in a study of nutritional problems in Australia and overseas will be made.

. :Som'e"f~search will b~ conducted in regard to foodstuffs commonly 'e.tiei1.! in other'~ountries, especially developing countries. Food will .be pre­pared using recipes from countries such as Indonesia, Philippines, New Guinea, Tanzania. Authentic methods of cooking and serving will be fol~owed wherever practicable. Any parallel between type of food eaten and the:, ",' nutritional status of the nation will be considered.

"J .,.... \'PraCtie:al woik -Preparation of equipment required in experimenta~ design. Experimental investigation of reactions of food substances and the ,e:ffectuponnutritional value and food preparation. Application of experimental findings in preparation, cooking, and serving of food. . .. ' .

ASSignments and Essays - Laboratory reports to be presented on completion of each set of experiments. Reports of the praCtical application based on own evaluation, and evaluation by section members of 'dishes cooked.

Text Books: The Chemistry of Nutrition and Food Processing.

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

Me:thodof As~'essment - Progressiveevalua'tion.

Part (iii) : Junior Home S~ience Method 2 hours per week

A ;'~tudy' o(sdh661 organi~ai:i~n' ~nd ~~htine will be made ~ithin the contexts of theoretical concepts and the schoo~ situation.

Topics will include: (a) The place of Home Science within the school and the part it can

play in the total school organization. (b) The efficient organization of a Home Science unit.

:" (c').A i ds to efficien'cy in or gani~ation. (d) Cooke~y'. schoolacc aunts. " . (e) Syllabus inte.rpretaJtion and .progra:rn:nling. (f) Problems of the practical lesson in sC~901$ ~ integrated where

~~~~;ible wi~ Cpl~~ge wor~~ . " i' • ' .

".;Practic'alwork - Teaching aids 'relevant,to school syllabuses - for lesson presentation and increasing the efficiency when organizing a Home Science unit. Practical Cookery ,Home'Management, and Laundry topics.

Assigrimen:tJ and Essay~ - Rep'ort~ on 'obs~rvations of school organization,-to be used .as suitable reference material if appointment is .to either a staffed oHomeScience unit or to manage the unit alone~'

Text Books: School Syllabuses in Home Science and C raft for Girls.

. "{,

Page 72: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

69

Reference Books: • ,':, I', •

Supplied a's requlred. .'J " : '.' .... '.'

. ': ;)\4:ethQd,.()f·A s s-es'sment.,.(.P~q.:g~~:f:I.~i ye ' ev~luation ~ .................... - ............ ~ ' ..... - .... - .. _" ............. ~ .. -... ~ .. '" .. " .. , ... ,-,,~ ..... -..

Part (iv) : Junior Needlework Method 2 hours per week (1 Term)

Section A - 'Teiithi~gSecoridary 'N~~idlework

,A,.:,~

1. Brief discussion on typical drafting lessons for Forms II, Ill, IV. Use of blocks, commercial patterns, and drafting.

2. Organization and preparation of Art Needlework. 3. Use and supervision of the "making" periods. ' 4. Marking of practical work. 5. Note book.

Section B - Practical Applic;aticm ... " ' .• " " . 'i ".,';;

1. Constructibn 6f 'S\'lit~bie corners 'for Art Needlework. 2. Suitable edge finishings for various types of embrOidery." 3. Examples of as many types of embroidery as possible in: time available.

Assignments and Essays - Practical needlework. ,

Text Books: Gough, E. L. G. : Processes in Dressmaking. Gough, E. L. G. : Principles of Garment Cutting. Department of Education: Basic Drafts for Secondary Needlework

Students.

Reference Books: Anchor: Manual of Needlework. Barrowman, A. C. and E. M. : Advanced Step by Step Sewin,g. Selection of Art Needlework Embroidery BO,oks. '. . ,

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (v) : Supplementary Science 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 3-year - Home Science/Textiles - .. Home Science/Textiles I : Supplementary Science (p.6S).

Part (vi) : Textiles 4 hours per week (2 Terms)

This course involves the integration of the following strands of textile study and application.

1. Textile Arts (a) clothing,

2. Design.

(b) embroidery, (c) furnishings.

3. Textile Science.

Practical work - Experimental investigation of the reactions of textile substances and the application of these reactions in textile arts and design. Practical clothing construction, embroidery and furnishing exercises which will give a broad understanding and knowledge and en coura ge c reati ve ability.

Assignments and Essays - Laboratory reports to be presented on completion of each set of experiments. Examples, usually a completed article, of practical exercises.

Reference Books: Supplied as required.

--_ .. _ .. _---------

Page 73: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

70

Method of Assessment - Progressive e~luation •

PHYSICAL EDU CA.'l'!.pN \ II 1 hour per week E"

• ~n :e;~tentJjonQ£Secondary School Games

Minor Games. , ' _ ~ .i . . : ·Ji::"( : . ., .. " .. _ •... ,-.. ..

Major Games - Cricket, Hockey,-'~enniS, Badminton.

. \' :.. Ut;npi~esl,. ,';1,"'e,t$, •

l .:...~. J t .. ' :., .;,', -

Tabloid Sports.

Progressive Ga.~es.

Swimming and Lifesaving.

! 1 .1' ~

Text Books: . , Handbook for Swimming Instructors ;';P~'E ~D.epartment., "

. '.1" :!. "- :.', '.' . .~ . . . \ ' . ,'::" -. L •• - • : '" ' • .,.': • .' .' '."

Refere~ce, J3ook~:. Life, ~"iJ;lg;Man.ual..:

, :!. :,1. L' 'Rtii~ 'Boo'ks o{ Gam.~ s . . ':".1\' ' t

Method of'Assessment - Unit tests.

; . , ~!::, • \ '. '

PART 'in "-~'-' "iEAR W

Not offered ~n J9,~~ .• ,

. \ .' ,~."~ ,". '.' \

... '::,.' \ .. '

, ' ~.' '

t ,:

:' :

. '

.' , '. ;

\ '.-.'

,"

'"

, ;','

<' • J.

Page 74: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

71

, ,,_,AL.I,.Q.GATION ,OF LECTURE aQ:URS TO ,SUBJECTS ) .~ .• :._.~.~._" .~.:':~::(.: • '4' ... ::: ~~~.' . ,: .. : •. ' .':~-~~ '-" :

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE, (,3,:Y:EAR) - INDUSTRIAL ARTS

YEAR I i,':,'1 \! , ( YEAR III YEAR II

II Hrs/wk1i, I SUBJECT Hrs/wk, SUBJECT I SUBJECT Hrs/wk I

Education I I,i 3' I !EducationlI ' • .' I 3 ! : Education III

Engliah I, 3 111EngliSh l~ ,,2 1!IEnglish III . 3 o 1 Health Education 1 0 III,Health Education II 0 Health Education III

Industrial Arts I ,Industrial Arts II I Industrial Arts III a.Crafts I 3 :a.Crafts 13 la.Craftsl' Z'

b.Drawing & Design 3 II b.Dra~~tl.~&Pesign! 3 i b.D~awin,g;& l)esign 3 c.Mechanics & I I" c.M~chanlCs .& i l':c.Mech~nic~ &. !

Material Science 3 I" _ ~viaterial Scienc~ 3 \ Matenal Science· 6 d.Metalwor,k. ... ,\\,;: 3. 'l,de •• wM'o~tO.adlwV!!oorrkk /,.5 l·d.Metalwork 3 e. Wood.work ''-'._' ' .. ' 3 ' 3 i e. Woodwork . (,,3 '

Mathematics I 3 il\i ... athematics II ! 0 IMathematics III 0 Physical Education I 1 ; IphysiCal Education I~; '1"'1 Physical Education III 1, Science I I 0 i ISd:enee'U" '." ":1 '3 I fScien~e III' ' . 'f" 3 Tutorials I as \ Z 11Tut~ria:lsII '.' ..' 'j 0 I : TutorialS III as I' 1

necessary' 11 d n\~:' "';" " ,.'F !l!'necessary ,

Total ~5/.Z711 Total .,j 2611 Total' ~5/26

,:, .. "

There are no option subjects. .'

Supp lementary and qualifyiq.g subjects,. ,tuto~ials and practice teaching are as set out under the heading ~f the Primary Teaching Course wi~,the·additional·requirement;·that Home Practice, and two peribds of practice teaching, each of three weeks' duration, are inCluded in the year III programme •

. ~ .' , - /",';,~"

.- ~ ~, . ; . r 1, " , : "

'" .>,

".; .:' ;: 1.

, !.;:. ~ '.," '.' i"-,' '.-

: " . :',).i ::": ~ .. ' ,

.. :.

Page 75: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

72:"

PART 1 YEAR I

ART I , , f\

..... _.- ........... NOT offe're-d 11'1' 1969~' .1 ..... :· ''',', . I ',1'\

ED-UCATION ·1··: "'EducationalPsycIioJogy Sec'ondary (a) 3 hours per week .. ' ".J:.'

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - Z':'year': - 'Prim~ry Teachi~g (p. 4)~.,' , :" ... . . \ '. . ~ ,.' . . ..

ENGLISH I : 3 hours per week , ~., .'. ... :.;',1'

, . ,": ( ',;: i ( • "

Part (i),',:, ~uUural Studies in Literature.' :. . ", ~. " '

1 hour per week o:',rr':,. f::(· 1;::: ;. "~:i

, ., I' . ~ ~ , .. :",

Refer·to Teacher'S Certificate ~ 2~'y~ar -' beographY/Comrllerc'e :.' " .. ~ .. : ;' .•. ,.... ';,J, ','. ( , ":' J \ ~ .

(p.3'6). ::~ .,' , ' ; ,: .

'., As'signInents~nd Essays. ; .. , .; 'c .' L shortessay.,.5QO-800 words - due end of ~pril. 2~, Long ess~y-: lO'()O~l200 words - due lJ"ulYk~j;'.; 3~ Seminar;.'::3dO~·400 words - due September{.~c:~~~e.:r •..

"' '-." . ~ .. -......... , ... '" . .... ~ -~.,- .. _, ._, ....

. . \ T ext Books: ' .. \ ( ! ',J',"

... _., ......... H.~f!li.I!~fl:Y, ~'" •... 4.9 .. Sto.ries ...... . Stone, L. : Jonah. Tennant, K. : The Battle r s. Golding, W. : Lord of the Flies. . <" < :

: '~ ", '

. :.' ,

. ~ . .'

" .f .J:; r: ~ .. ,"' : '.

Shakespeare, W. : 15 Plays. . ' .. The: peftgujin'Bbok(jfEng1ish'Verse~:'.:c: ., '. . • '.

: r.:. ',: ... r 'J,,' :) ~t : : ! .' ::; ::.:. .' ; , ',; .. ,.,.' " " ...~" i ,r'. . . ", " :' " ", . :": ,,' ."

Methodgf Ass.essment-, J?rp..gres.5ive .a~s~~sment throu,ghassignment • . ' .. ".'1 '. "

Final writtene~mination.., .•.• ",i L i ',.~:'

Pallt (ii) : Practical Written English 1 hour per week

.,', ; , ..... ;'.f . I',

This course is printed for the guidance of students whose English Expression needs to be improved.

1. Some samples of composition, grammatically correct, but containing words carelessly chosen and used. Exercise in choosing and using best words. Harmony in writing. Atmosphere.

2. (i) Types of Prose Composition - descriptive, narrative (reproductive, expository, imaginative), analytical, argument, reflective.

(ii) Structure - introduction, development (crises, climax), conclusion. Setting (time, place). Characters. Explication, complication and resolution of plot (rising and falling action), denouement, catastrophe.

(iii) Steps in writing composition - collection, selection, organization of material.

(iv) Balance and Unity. (v) Examples and exercises.

3. The Paragraph, Structure, Topic Sentence. Unity, contunuity, balance, emphasis, variety, length. Headings and sub-headings. Samples of well constructed and "straggling" paragraph'S7.

Page 76: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

73

4. The Sentence -(i) Definition - "unit" of communication.

(ii) General requirements - formal correctness, exactness, clearness, conciseness, completeness, effectiveness.

,(iii).5otne:errors!in grammar aiid usa'ge - c()llective nouns, distributives, relative pronouns, other pronouns. adjectives, verb form$, adverbs, c onjunc tions'. ' '.'

(iv) Structure - subject word(s). finite verb extensions.' (v), Cla:esiiic,ation of sentences ":simple, compound, complex (loose,

periodic, loose-periodic), parenthetical. (vi) Some faults - lack of finite verb. principal clause, incorrect order

of words, wrong word relationships, monotonous repetition of the same word. ,," ,

(vii) FUnctions of the Sentence -'statement, question, command" exclamation, wish.

(viii) Characteristics Qf the Sentence- unity, length, balance, emphasis, wish.

5. The Word -(i) The Parts of Speech. Some word forms.

(ii) VO,c~9ul~r,y - ,~ids to impr~ving~;~se of the word. (iil) Rtiies' o(Word Usage - propriety, Simplicity, purity, brevity.'" (iv) Power of particular words - adjectives, verbS, adverbs, sounds of

words. (v) Synonyms, antonyms, homonyms, homophones.

(vi) "Overworked ll words, double comparatives and superlat~ves, tautology, hackneyed expressioQs"c1iches. '

6. The Rules of Syntax. Some Idiomatic Forms.

7. Punctuation - historicalb~,ckgr()u,nd, purpose. Marks and Rules of Uses, espec,iallyfuU:stop" ,'con¥na! ,question mark, ,semi-colon.

\ '" \ ,: 'I. •. .

8. Figurative Language and Literary Deviees· -(i) Literal antl,FigUrative;;Unguage. ' Why use figurative lC\nguage and

literary devices? ' " ' (ii) Simile, metaphor I personification, apostrophe, metonymy,

synec.dofh'~"f.J::typ~rbole-, ,el)phemism, antithesis, crisis, climax, arit{:"Al:iriiaX:.~,-~piR~am, paradox, irony, humour, wit, pun, pathos.

(iii) Sound, devices- assonance" alliteration, onomatopoeia, vowels "(Long, short). consonants (ha.:t:d, sharp, ,bitter; soft, tender, peaceful, melodious, lingering).

(iv) Repetition, epithets ,rhythm, rhyme I direct speech (dialogue). 9. Business Lette~ Viriting,­

(i)' Need for, definition. (ii) Parts of letter, detailed explanation of.

(iii) Points to note.;. arrangement, first and second sheets, enclosures, folding, t:p.eenv~lope.

(iv) 'Forms of Letter - i~dent, block, block-indent. (v) Style and general qualities - layout, spacing, spelling, ~egibility.

10. Precis Writing. Meaning of, •. Merits of and ,Purposes of., Stepsin writing preci"s. ' Rul~s for ,writing. Examples.

11. Paraphrase a11-d Elaboration.

12. Treatment of errors in spelling, usage. pronunciation,' e~c., commonly found in written and spoken work. .,'

>Text BookS: " •. r'

Bayliss: School Certificate English. Ballard: The Teaching and Testing of English. Herbert: What aWord. King and Ketley: The Control of Language. 'Wilson: English - Spoken and Written.

Page 77: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

74

j'.).' \", '.;

Reference Books: '.,':> .. !

The Oxford, .t)~ctiqn~,~Y •... .-.: i.'. ,:

. c··"R:6~etffrTliesaurus~"'·.,.·_ ,~:" ,. ,." : .. Fowler: The Kingl}-E~gii'sh.'Dictionary of Modern,Engli'sh,:Usage.

'.::.': Gowers ':-t:;bmplete 'Plain WQrds. ' , o Gta.vcisandHo'dge! :'TheReader Over Your Shoulder'. 1v'~itchell : The, Use of English. . Og,ilvie andA~b~rt :A Practical cQU:rse in Se~ondary English.

>":'Quirk: Th'e' Use of English. Richards: Basic English,and .Its Uses. Tt'eble a.nd· Vallins : The A.:B. C. of English Usage. 'Warner : On the Writing of'English. Strunk and White : The Elem~nts of Style. Also College 'Libra.rY 420-429; R423. .

,·.:~Iethod.ofAssessment, - 'Writtenexammation~

Part (iii) : Oral Expression I hour per week ';:.:

Refer to Teacher' s.· Ge.rtificate~i2'-:::yea::t- ',Geoi~aph:yjco~~l!C;~/[ ') . " ,",' , ..... " " .

(p. 36). '.,'

~ I .' '-. i:"~' " •

:,1 ( '~

INDUSTRIAL ARTS I 15 hours per week .-" ,.,,( ,"'0:'

: ,J :, ' i !'

" ,.\.' (.1 .. _,', ' ;:,", ,':.;,' .~:~.,<rrJ·' " ,\,,',C ':: ~ ,'(\: c,'''· Pa:rt (i)': Crafts - Bookbinding .~~d Method

3 hours per week .,

A. Bookbinding. . ',.'..... '. ,'" ... q '. ,) i, . t' .. - '.: 1 r . " , ' .~~ . .J "." :; !)

' ....... :~) .:M~t~odSt()-f bookbinding:artd' paper decoration •.. Lo6s~ leaf., si~gl~ section and mult-i~.~ction books~' " Marbling end papers,' cover printhlg and

decoration.: .. :'" " .. '.' .. A study of the principleso:tde~igna~d theappl~cation;tQ(book

, ... ' ",: ,',' ',., . ,! "','

coiri:#o sftion ahd dis pIa y ~ .', . . .: . ,

I

B. Method.<. . ..' . ,": ,j ; ,-

.l'he: pUl\pose- of , this courSe is t6co~!6~dinatethe t~aching',>meth~d of the ,va~9'\lS ,subjec.ts ~ghtin' the field of Craft and Industl."ia1 ~'rts~ .' ." ,

5.tudent te<;tcherlS' will, be· require:d' to -0 b'se rve demons tration Ie a,sona, prepare lesson notes, ~ake charts :,' and:t~ach:ing' aids, cbrnpiieloose' leaf reference books on Woodwork, Metalwdrk; Technical Drawing,'rnd~~trial Arts and. Cr~ts ... Safe working procedure-s;will beemph,asized."

Exercises in perspective drawing will be included in the course. This work will include the perspective of shadows •.

" \'1

,.' '. <', . • • .1' .

Practical w0:t:~ wg~~e,cCl::rri~:~. out in ~~:ch le~ture . .. . , .. ~ r.; ", l! .' I . . i :- " r . . ,- , ,. . : •

ASSignments and Essays - Practical work'commenced irile~ture,s will have to be completed asassigtlments~" '," .' ',;

'. \ : .,.:, . . l ~ i' ' Text'Books: ; .\ i " '/

Delpartmentof :Education : Craft leaflets. .' .' .': :1

Department of Education: Craft and Indtish';ial Arts Syllabuses. Wilcox, W. E. : Perspective Drawing for,:a~ginners.

Reference Books: ,.' , "," " College Lihra~y' ~t 371,!' 6ih -76o:.,7.Z·O.~7:~9., Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation and aSSignments.

!'': ( ,. . ~,

. : ~. , .: ;

::'" " l' ":\" ~ ';. ,J, :

--- -------------~--~--

Page 78: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

75

Part" (ii)' : Drawing andDesign 3 hours per week ' ,

, ;:-

This course is de,signed to establish basic concepts in Engineering Drawing, Descriptive Geoirietry, Architectural Drawiq.g and Pictorial Drawin'g. Provisiotlts also'made for inclusion of such drawing ,as u~ed in ,cabinet work.

Emphasis on a high quality of draughtsmanshipwill be maintafued at all times and methods of efficiently imparting these,ski~ls, to ,others will be studied. The syllabus as taught in the schools has been analysed into"basic units pi. wQrkll. Students are to be shown how these can be used as lesson notes.

. . . "

The' flAustralian Standard Drawing office Practice'; and the"IIArchitect­ural and Building Practice ll to be introduced and the importance cfstandardization in drawing procedures to be stressed.

Both first and third angle projections will be used but only ·the first angle method to betlsed in Descriptive Geometry.

. . ~.. " "", . . ..

The relationship between orthographic, isometric, oblique,"';' axonometric and per Spec tive drawings:wil1. .. l>e s~llc1~e~

Some examples in freehand sketching of machin,e"part,s a.nd, ,: architecturald~taas~b~th.assembl.ed ~nd "exploded" to be g~ven.,: ,"

The solution of problems relating to the practical application of plane and solid geometry will also be "given.' ;'..,.j'"

Basic teaching methods are to be combined with the various tQpics listed a,s ,~ac:h, topic is: presented and demonstratidn lessoIB showing how, topics, are taughtin the,schoQts will be presented. and the vaHousteachirtgptocedures used will be discu,s~.~g,~ter each demonstration. ( ,;,

Practica.l';w.otkwill be carried out during lectures.

ASSignments and Essays -Practical work commenced in lectuFes will be completed as' .~,ssignments. A machine drawing'willbe coinpleted each fortnight as an assignment.

Text Books: Fitness, E. W. : Descriptive Geometry and Drawing, BookS I,'II, Ill. Steel, G. and Fitness, E. W. : Descriptiv,e Geometry and Drawing,

Senior Boo~. '

Reference Books: '" Abbot, W. : Practical Geometry and EngineeriJ'lg:, Graphics, •• The Institute of Engineers, Austral:i3. : Australian Standard Engineering

, Drawing ;Practice; Sydney, 1966. ' " ;"., ,', ' , ; " Standards Association of Australia: Australian Stanctard Architectural

and Building Drawing Practice. Also College Library at 515, 744.

"., ". ,~

Method of Assessment - ASSignments, progressive evaluati~n and yearlyexamina.tion. '

" -. Part '(~ii) : Mecha'nics and Materials Sciencel 3 hours per week'

A study of the history of tools (inc1'o.ding machine' tdols).

A complete stp.dy of modern methodS of produ'dng'machine toois including:

(ar Types 6f materials used, (b) Method of forming, (c) Types of machines used.

,1"

• ~ • r J. :

. , \ ~

";,""

~ . '\ '. . .' ,

" I,'.

Page 79: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

76

Various industrial processes will be studied, ~.g. wire drawing, production of bar and plate. In this study special 'ref~ren(:~ will be .made to cold working, recrystallization, annealing and normalising.

,;-rSimple machirieSwillhe s'tudtedconcurrentlywith the above ,processes; : Students will' beexpec'tedto take. an active part in the design of a .simple·machine to·serve:a given purpose. Only simple calculations will be made at this s@ge of the course •.

:jJ.., ! . ;:' .. ::"' :.,r· ',' '.' ", ." '.'

'LabOl"atbryworkwil~ be carried o:ut in each lecture!'

. . ..• Assfgn~,entsa~d"Essay~ - Laboratory work commenced in lectures '~ilihe' c'ompleted as assignments. Written assignment of 2000 words on Histo.ry'of 'Technology due fourth ~eek of each term.

_. ~ . ,> ' .. ",. . , ;' "I'" " • '., ... . .., \ I .

,,' ,.... Text Books:

Higgins: Engineering Metallurgy (Part 1). ....,. '·,J.ensen and Chenoweth : Appli'ec1Ell'gi~eering Mechani<;:~.

Derry and Williams: Short History of Technolo·gy. ."

Reference Books:' ' '., Colle ge Library at '6'20, 660- 68'0 ~., "

Method of' Assessment '- As~:igilments., progressive' ~ra.lua~ion~ and. 1 ~ " ; , .' • . ,

yearly examination. . '. : (": :

:,"-1.i: ipi~t(iv)";Metalw'o~k 1 ~ Fitting and NIachinin.g

3 hours per week

.' 'this ;cour~~ ~s design~ci to give student. teache'l"s an opportunity'to d~v~!opsI411sin fit~jng,and.machining •. Models in the.coursewilI:be· typical' of the Jobs attempted by school pupils..in this aspect of MetiUwork:" " .' Associated theory will be given to supplement, th.e pra~tica.l w:o;-k.

• '.' I ; ~ . ~ : i '! l ,: ~. j ;"'. .;,,' .,'; . . . . . " .

This course will be given at the Technical Coll€lge. , .. • ' :.. ~ .;" ", • " , .,. ~ .; <;'.. • . • " '

,'(

Pr~ctical workwlllbecar,ried out durin·g,lectures.,

ASSignments and Essays - Study textbook~' to supp:lement theory lectures.

;.Text Books: . Sdtith Bend: 'Lathe : Ho~ t~' Run '1 Lathe. Sydney Technical Co1ieg~ :'T~ad'e Technology, .Books 1 and li.

Reference Books: College'Libraryat 660;';611.: .'

,",: 'L,

• ,,", . ~ 1 . • "

'Method of Assessment .-:,.:p,rogre~.si'Ve .evaluation.-theory and practical te sts at end e>f. ye~r '"

' .. ::," \ . " : . ,

Part (v) : VI oodwork 1 3 hours per w€.Ek

::-:1 l,. :, ., ", , "\ ::"J' . :": \ ':' '" . " >. ,:, ,.

'This cotiree is designed to give student teachers an opportunity to develop skills in the fundamental operations in Woodwork. Models in the course will include basic woodwo.rls.joints, .glove box' and shaving'c:::abibet. Associated theory will be given to'suppleme'llt the practical work.

This coul," ~ e will l;>egi ven at the , Wechnical College.

~;rac;tic'7~ w:orkVl(~ll be carried out· during lectures.

ASSignments and Essays - Study textbooks to su:pplemen,t ,theory and practical work given in lectures. . .

Text Books: Douglas and Roberts: Units in Woodworking. Walton : ','1 oodwo rk The ory and 1- ractice.

~ ~ i " ... I

:',;'

Page 80: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

77

Reference Books: "~, :-;" College' "Lihra'rY" at "684-,:690 ~

.(::1""·\(~':)~'~ \:·&l.,;::\~":.:i!.',~ .<."' ~\.""";,, ").;;!:i.:i

Method of ~s!ses'sm~nt -Progressive' evaluation - theory and practical tests at the end of, the year.

:MATHEMA TICS I 3 hours per week

Mathematics for Industrial Arts Students

Triangle trigonometry

Elementary co -ordinate geometry.

Graphs of simple polynomial functions.

Differentiation of polynomial functions.

Stationary values of functions.

Primitive functions.

Areas under curves. approximation methods, the definite integral.

Application of the calculus to kinematics, centroids, projectiles.

Further differentiation - product rule, quotient rule, chain rule.

Application of calculus to circular functions. logarithmic functions and inverses.

Methods of integration.

Further physical applications of the calculus.

Simple differential equations and their applications.

ASSignments and Essays - Small weekly class assignments.

Reference Books: Allendoer and Oakley: Principles of Mathematics. Thomas : Calculus. A yre s : Calculus.

Method of Assessment - Final examination and class tests.

PHYSICAL EDUCA TION I : Secondary School Games 2 hours per week

1. Administration and principles of Physical Education.

2. Planning a Games Lesson.

3. Minor Games, e. g. Post Ball, Corner Ball.

4. WJ.ajor Games: Softball, Hockey, Rugby League, Cricket, Racquet Games.

5. Athletics: (a) Basic techniques of track and field. (b) Standards. (c) Organisation of Athle.tics Carnival.

6. Gymnastics: (a) Lesson Plan. (b) Mat and Box Work. (c) Rope and Bar Work.

7. Body Mechanics - the skeletal system.

8. Swimming and Life Saving.

9. Tabloid Sports.

Text Books: Handbook for Swimming Instructors.

Page 81: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

78

Reference Books: Department of Education The Alternattve Cur:i:i~t!.lum i~' Physical

Education for Secondary Schools. ~:),: _,"" 1ShysJc;al,~duCC}.ti,Qn""P\,lblication: : Track and Field.

'Dewitt, R. J. : Teaching Individual and Team Sports. R. L. S. Australia : Life Saving Manual.

Method .o£A;ssesstn,ent .:t1nlr~e~ts .. '"

SCIENCE I

Not offered in 1969.

"'::. ;, :',," .... ~. ; ! .

. '. ~ . .: ;

,.' ..•.. ,I.

, :.\.:

", :

. ',j" ~ , ; ,'.

.) ,

" ~

.:.'

Page 82: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

,. ,. 79

j' ,

.(q)'J;'v,l~ ",'! '.",,,:' .'.

Not offered in 1969. ,.,' , ' ': .;.:; '~i' .. ."1 : l :

EDUCATION II : The School and the Ad~l~scent : J.'.' .. .' .

3 hours per week

,Thili CCnll'S~ ;coversthe:following'broadtopic$: '

(a) The N. S. W : Educational Sy~te~, 'its organisation, stru~ture, examiIlatioIl syst~,m, ~tc.

(b) A study of the adolescent: intellectual,' soCial, emotional, phySical, moral development.

"

(c) The pupil-teacher relationship in the secondary school.

ASSignments and Ess~ys ,-, Assi~n;tents:" of ~pprox. 600-1000 words" are recluired eve~y three' (3) weeks~ " each,

, '

.,! (;' ·t' ..... '. ). • . .

,:T. ext :Book,s,:, '- ' )-, Connell, W. : Foundations ofEduc~tiq~.

l '.',

, ,¥e~hod,o£ Assessment - Continuous evaluation throughout the year by aSSignment work and class testing.

, i,.\" "\. \

ENGLISH II : ,Cultur~l.studies, in English Z hours per week

, •• 1

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - Z-year Geography'Comnierce (p.4l). '. l,;·,· .. · <.

ASSignments and Essays -1. Short essay - 500-800 words - due end of April •. Z. Long essay - 1000-1200 words ~ due· July. 3. Seminar - 300-400 words - ,due September/OCtober.

Text Books: , .' ~

Conrad, J. : No s tromo. Fitz gerald, S. : The Great Gatsby. Shakespeare, W. : 15 Plays. Stow, R. : Merry-go-round In The Sea. White, P. : The Tree of IYlan.

,,'1;'~ePe,n,guinBook of English Verse.

. ":"., ! ...... :

" ,., ,',).

Method of Assessment - Progressive asse:s,sment i:llrough asdgnments -final examination.

HEALTH, EDUCA orION II :' Health Education,'

Not offered in 1969.

INDUS'.l'RlAL ..!\R T$, II 17 ppurs per w,~e~ :

. 1:

Part (i)':CraItll : Ce:tamic s a~d Method 3 hours per week

:, ."

,', I. ;- ~ ;

:' .

i;:

This course is designed to provide the student with a broad back­ground in ceramics with paJ."ticular emphasis being placed on 'the tecllriiques and ~~ilJ.~ :c~~.~ined ,in ;~he: Ceramics, Syllabu;:s'for Forth'S :II~ III,and IV,_ , , '"

.... . . J:. ~; .. _,. ,.... .... ' ',': ;" .' ,: ~(/;.,\, ... 'I.,. ).:~. .:, ';,! ~":".".:~ .• : ;'.1", '·1 .. ~_'.·./

Students' will: -be' encouraged to 'experilllent,wi~~c4y:(an4,glaze, .i,;;d" \l:';,,:; composition' and; 'a:pplicatlon.' " ' ','

Page 83: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

80

Models and projects will be designed to afford practice in the various methods of joining, shaping, and decorating clay.

topics: The course will place emphasis upon an understanding of the following

Principles of design as applied to ceramics. Nature,preparation and storage of clay. Testing and physical propertieso! clay. Ceramics and industry. Tools, materials and .equipment used for decorating and glazing. Composition, mixing and applicati~~ ,of, g~a;z,es.

'; *ihfs and kilhfurnitur e . . , .. '. ., ,

Control and testing of heat and atinosphere in the kiln. , ' , ',:i" "A,~.t~on()f. hea.t ,~n, cla y. . . " ,.

Mould making and slip casting. Plating and coating of ceramics.

} [ ~ _. '; ;" .. : ::"; J ";. . : ":

B. Method. 'The 'work in"Method will foll~w dosely'th~work as set.out in the

syllabuses for each Industrial Arts sub'j~'ct i~i the' s'econdary sch~ol. . Emphasis will be placed on teaching me thod and not on ?ractical work.

" .. ' ,~ . \ l : ~ '.~ .,; , _." A ,,: : :', ' • • •

Work in perspective drawing'will be more advanced than the work given .i,n ,th.e,fir,st: yea'r cour'$e. '.,Each dra.wing wi11be:relide reil in 'colour.

. . . . .' . . " ~'-: .. ", . ; ; \.. . \ ",: :

Practical work will be carried out in each lecture.

ASSignments and Essays - Work~o~~~¢~ltj.n lectures will be: completed as aSSignments.

, , . '.~ . '.' I .'

Department of Education: Craft and Industrial Arts Syllabuses. Wilcox, W. E. : Perspective Drawing fo~ Beginners.

. I .

Reference Books: Roy, Vincent A. : Ceramics: An illustrated guide to creatlng

" and enjoying pottery. ' Jenkins, R. Horrace : Practical Potte ry. Kenny, John B. : Pottery Making. .. Rhodes, Daniel: Clay and Glazes foz:th~'Potter. Culver Long, Lois: Ceramic Decoration. ' Kenny, John B. : Ceramic Design. College Library at 371, '378, 607-609', 720-749 ..

Method of Assessment - As,signmentsand progressive eValuation.

:'Part(ii) i Drawing and'Desigll :ir 3 hours per week

This course is designed to wid.en the experience of .th.e, student in such drawing fields as they have already studied nam,ely Engineering Drawing, Descriptive Geometry, Architectural Drawing and Pictorial Drawing.

BaSic teaching methods are to be combined with the var;ious to:pic;s: ,',: as they are presented and demonstration lessons showing how to'pics are t'aught in the schools will be presented and the various J~ac;hing p,ro'cedl,1:res used will be discussed after each demonstra:tion~"" ... ,

The recommended practice for Architectural and Enginee,ring Drawing will be studied in detail.,

Engine.e."i~;g prawing. ',' . Dra.wing of individual machine parts; the; selection of examples to

be varied according to the background in the s,upj~ctpossesse4 by the individual membersofti:e ;gr6up~ th~aiinbeing a~~orrnstan,d~~4 o£.wo:rk,

Page 84: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

in basic principles by the end of the year.

,r·.", ; 'Both:£i~st ~n:d thi;rda~glepr~jectioll are ro;be·us.ed. .' ' , .,.,' ~

"" 'I', •

Experience~q1:>~, ga~Jiled it;l the making of su,b-assembly and assembly drawings. . ," ,,'J, , " " " ,"

'Pikpiration of tracings.

Methods of reproducing drawings.

"1: ., Archite,ctural and Pictorial Drawing. , , , " ·A:r,Chitectural. Symbols arid scales used 'lnhouse planning. Som.

detail drawing of typical features·ie.g., window, door, etc.

Detail of joints used in a timber frame dwelling. Names of various ,rne,m.ber s, in' the frame construction ~ ."

Students to prepa~e aplano£ a dwelling to ce,rtain specified limits of area, liVingi;,~q\1i~emel}.ts, "etc.Spe~ifications for such a building to be discu'ssed~ ',.. ' ,,'., " '

Experiefice, in the reading of drawings of a diagrammatic or arrange­m.ent form, to be gained. The use of symbols and legends, pipe arrangement drawings, sur.vey and electri~aI9rawings, and,simila1!·type's of ' drawings.

,':: ... ,.,.1 '.;. ,:.' ,. " . , '. ,

Pictorial. The use of isometric, oblique, axonometric and~echanical perspective drawings related to: ," ,

The drawing ofarChlte:ctutal. deta.i1s'lana::~*t~;:na.1 Vie~.s .. ' The preparation of pictorial drawings of machine parts In suitable

2'" ,. form!orus,e in the . students' later tea~hing~ , . ' "',' The standar~ form of l,e,ttering and dimensioning is to be used on :-,

';th~seAra.wings. '," ,.' ,:;(;' ;yt c:

Descriptive Geometry - only first angle projection to be ~s~d. '.' ,,' .

(a) Orthographic projection of solids hi specif~edpositions by r~tatio~ and auxiliary projection~ , ., ',' " (i) .~pec~fi~d in rela;tion to refe.rence planes. ,"'(ii) ta~eJy.ing in, a11. oblique plane.,· . ',~,:"

(b)' lntersectlon 9f a solid and a line. ,"" ' tc) Secti~~s of solids by inclined,a:nd oblique plane,s;. true shape of , ,

section (special reference to conic sections). (d), Intersection of solids; obtaining;:lines of intersection bysu~ta,l>l.e .'" cuttin.g.plane s." "\. ,.'- "

2. ,Development" ' , " " ': ' ,r r,;:'J ' .

.; '. c~ :,; :

, (a:) Simple examples:"; sectional cone, pyramid, intersecting cylinders (pipe elbows).

(b) Transiti,on.duc.ts ;~ triangulation - use of true length diagrams. (c) Approximate development of a sphere. . ,

'c":(d) Plane Geometry..:. polygons~'tangetltsand areas,inv;olutes, spirals, cyc1oidalc'Ui'ves and ~orii~ sections.· ...

", • ,: t"<

. ,' ,

3. Locating points spatially. . ' . Using Cartesian co-ordinates locate positions of points and. .lines.

'" . . ,'., .' , '

4. Oblique lines ..

5. Oblique planes.

Pictorial Drawing. ... '. The difference betweBn isometric drawingarici is~metric pr~j'ection

\ ,. . :. ". ''': .t.' ~ "

will be determined using an axonometric plane (oblique plane). Spheres and hemisph,er.es, V!'iJlr:,\l~ drawA in i~ometric projection'exerCises.·

" , ,,'.'., .", , ........ , ,

- ---------- ,---,------ ----------_ ... _ .. __ ._--,----------------

Page 85: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

82

Cabinetwork Drawing . 'J.:'" ";';.:

Drawings included will be selected for corr~lation with Cabinetwork course, and will·lead to 'the drawinfof wdrkin::g:;rod:s'~ :'. .

"j':ic', .',;0'. Prac:t.'i<talworkwuibecat'riedout during lecture·s.

Assignments and Essays - Drawings commenced in Jectures will be completed as assignments.

. ; .. '.: '. . " .:. ",

;: ,.i'

Text Books: . ~ ... , .,.:,' .. .. ' .

Fitness, E. W. : Descrip~~veGeoznetryand Drawing, :Books I, II, III. Steel, .G. and jfitne:ss, E.,., W •.. : Descriptive Geometry and Drawing,

, ~", . ': ;.': . '." .; .

; !, 'J'. ;." Senior ,Book.

Reference Bookl;!:. Parki~son, ·A. C. : Pictorial Dra~iJ;lg for Engineers. Pitman, London,

1954. ::' Theiln:stitute' of'Engirieets /Atistralia;: Australian' Standar~.Enginee:ring

d~(f ' ......• " :". Drawing Pr~ctice, Sy~~e'y~. 1'966. Standards Association of Australia: Australian Standard Architectural

and .l3ui,-lding. DraWing Practice, 'c,;, SyQney .. : "': ',.

...Meth~··of :~ssessment .... ' ·Assignment,:p~og~essiv~l'eV1.1tia.tion.~ ~fld,"i ," yearly e~mination. ." ,:, ":'.: .. ' i

, . : ~ . .'

. ',:,: "" t' ~ , ' . : ':' ') (1 '" .. , .. ~

Part (iii) Mechanics and1v.[.a~~~ialsi $c;:ien~e II . . . 3 hours pe~ :",,~ek. " .:: ,'j 1\ .~ .•.... : ,Jt i' ; \' ') j.;' 'o..! :-~ . , ; ": ~'. . ;, . ',' ._ .. " : : ".', ,1, ',"; \ ..

A study of the histoi'y1of matedals,jused'by manth:w;ough' th~ ages. This will ·be followed by 'a' de tailed study :61 ; mode rn 'ma.terials~' Is pe'Cial emphasis being placed on metals. Discussion of moderli' riiethbdsof production, testing a~d m~~ef\np~,~~~:~~ .. ~he~e"m<t~e,r.~al~., .,' ,i.

Discussion of how the properties of these materials influence .design ~nclr,:r~r _~e. ~D:~eer ~'t~.t~;~d~r~tan~:so~e.:~f:)the~orei;rnportant properties before he can begin to design a structure <?J;,~lJl~c~ine. :.:,',

A considerable'atnOtirit'of 'time'",vili 'f.i~ ~pent i~ the' te$tipg laboratory conducting research into the propertieS';didifferenfmaterials: .. The student should become familiar with such, properties'cis::'hardne'ss, 't~~sii~ 'strength, ~ she'erstrength and'comprebehs:ive strength,;· .,::.: it ,"C

. :" :,t3"';, ' ~ "~:: : ; .. :l.~.·""!'·'(' ",: ,:,:: . "'\. :,1 . :~.': :,,~':

, . Micrrostructures of rp.~teri~~s b.~,in,gphy~~c::a~lyt~stedsho\ll~;be examined to"see :i(th~re is a~y rela.tion'ship betweenstructure,~nd(physical properties.

Some simpleeJ)gineeriDgmechanics such as calculations,.ofstress,,· . str~it;ltan~ ~?~, u,~e~9~, Yo~n~~ ~ ~ M04ulus ''fJll'.l?~:,deal~; with in '(Jonjunc.tion with work done in the testing laboratory. . (.:," :,:q ;'.:)

. " ~ ,Laboraitory 'work will be car tied ,'out (in: each' i~dute/ 'I! , .' : ~, J ,~.,. , . - ....

AEisf~~ents and ~E3se-Ys, -.,~b2FCl,~Q,ry.w9r,~<:orp.mencedin(lectures will be cofuplefe(i as a~~~.~~~.nt:~.(,'W,r:~~tei\~s~~gn~ent,~k9f ZOOOicy.rords on History of Technology'fourth week of each term. ."

~ ': ~ f . .":.:.: , ," ;', ,; ',' (.":.' .. 1.' ... / ('~ .

Text Books: . ." '. . . i ., '." ;:, _ .. ', ' •.

iiiggins ;:'1thgine~rihg'Me'cidiurgy (Part 2). Beer and Johnson: Vector Mechanics for Engineers ~,) r.·.' ..

Oakley, Kenneth P. : Man the Toolmaker. Rollason : Metallurgy for Engineers.

Reference Books: . .. C61lege"~ibrrari620,"660-680.~.· :c" \ (; fJ i, \.:

'~'.(i< i .:.~.I,.i··f : r.~:': r' ; ,',()' ,.\. ,.,1

Method of AS$e-stimen4:;,.As·signment,' progi"es"slv~ evaluatit>n, ~hd' "[ yearly examination.

Page 86: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

Part (iv) : Metalwork II 5 hours per week

83 -.. -", ',.,

. :.:". ,:

This course will be given at the Technical College arid it consists of the following parts: . ;\. • .... ~

(a) Welding. (b) Blacksmithing '. ( 'i .'

(c) Sheet metalwork. (d) Farm Mechanics.

Practical work will be carried out during lectures.

AS&igmnerits and Essays - Study 'textbooks to ~upplem~nt lectures.

Text Books: J\tki~, ,; ;F'racticcq . .sheet and Plate Metalwork •. ,Ca~p~~;l~ ~ ~~61e~~:~. \ '1' ; . ,"," , ,~ • ':, .• ," .~. \ Harcourt : Working and Heat Treatment of Steel. Jones: Shopwork on the Farm.

. . ' " . ~ . .. .., '.~ .!.: ~, . ! :1 ' • . f ' 1\" ,"

Reference Books: ." <,iii: College Library at 630, 660-671" 682.

. j. . . .; '. . .. 'J': . . .~ '. :" ~.' :' .. ; '. ' ~ ~.: .; , ;" : ;. ,

',"., "Method Q~ A~8es.s~~nt - Progrt:'_si-ve evaluation. , Theory 'and , 'practical te ats at end of year. , .

,,:; ~:J.""J .r ... ~ ;}:';:, ;. "': '.~", . "<) :):','. ,:." '(I .IJ.) ~'.' . r:\!. ~.' .. ~. :~\

Part (v) : Woodwork II 3 hours per Weeki:' ,

....... i

':. ' .. ' .

.,' '., .;- .,' ~.' . .. ," ; . ~

"'~lT~~~lc~1:lrse vv.ill })egiven at ;t,he:.Technical College.' . It will consist of the following part~: ,·.i ,i,' , ,l" ,!,,:),: ';'.'.U

(a) W oodturning and woodmachining. (b) Wood finishing.

I, I' '" LI, ., .

Practical work wil~becarriedoutJn leetures,~

Assignments and Essays - Study textbooks to. supplement,theory lectures. ;'

T ext Books: . . \.,

, :'. .. ": .~ i ~ ~..) i ,I,:'

Department of Labour and Industry: French Polishing. Slater: Wood Turning Made .Easy~",

Reference Books: . !';:

College Library at 684. ,..; ".,' !";".,

Metho'ci 'of .Ass~ssment - Progressive evaluation. te sts at end of year.

MA THEWlA TICS II

Not offered in 1969.

PHYSICAL EDUCA TION II 1 hour per week

Athletics.

Secondary School Games II

Theory ,arid practieal

Major Games - Soccer, Basket Ball, Cricket, Racquet Games. Swimming and Life Saving. Vaulting and Agility. UlXIpires' Certificates. Planning and Physical Education Lesson. Sportsmaster's Duties.

Practical work - practical application of major games, etc.

Text Books: Handbook for Swimming Instructors - Dept. of P. E.

Page 87: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

-'-- 84

Reference Books: ",i.' ' .', .1..-:' •

Official Rule Books. '. Tra~~ and FiElld.(Rhy~dl~p.Cp~;Op.).

;' ~ r;1:beparirileilt"hi'Edilcatlon : The Games Book. R. L. S. S. Manual 1968 Edition.

Method of Assessment - Unit tests.

SCIENCE II : Physics 3 hours per week

Mechanics: . S_ta~~cs, dYW1mi,cs,,>e~ergy,. work, power, friction • . \ ".':. ~~ .: . , ". :

Elasticity.

Heat: Heat transfe'r,coriseI'vatioiiofene'rgy~ expansion, change of state, temperature scales, calorimetry, calorific values~j'the gas laws. . .. ::::'. '. ". _, .. ; L.·· ':' , .

Wave motion: general nature", . th~ electromagnetic spectrum, light and colour, the inverse square law. . ' ., "

•... ' ", " .. :) ", . Electricity: introductory electrostatics, electric current, potential,

:"r.~si~ta,nc;e, ,cir,cui.t .problems, power', energy,'measurlng' i'nstrun;tent,s. f \' I .~ ,,: '.' ,:, ' .~:. ':. J .::'~ " , ;: ; • 'J ~ . ;

Hydrostatics: pressure at depth, action on submerged surfaces, pressure transfer, applications. "',i: ,,:;.,i

Laboratory work will be coordinated with theory topics.' ,

.,As:signmentsand Essay,s';.;' Problem 'la.ssigi1me~ts ,completion of practical work, on weekly basis - some 2 hours per week.

Text Books: Borchardt: A First Course in Mechanics. Borchardt: A Second Course in MeChanics.

I " ," ~

Martin and Connor: Basic PhySics. Halliday and Resnick: PhYSics. Mess~l (Editor) : Mechanics of Particles .•

~ \,'

I ' .:, (',:,:: i": .,' ,: ,"'j . \ : . ' .. <, . '. . ., " . , , "": Sound an~ Waye Motion~,:~, .

: Electricity and Magnetism. : Kine'tic Theory of Matter. :.

~. '

,:1,

I" ,'f;

Method of Assessment - Assignments, periodic testing, and final ,ex~in~ti()n. ,"': :." .. ,,: "., .I',;; .' , .'. " ." ": ~

Page 88: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART III

ART III : .. ' .'

YEAR III

Not offered in 1969~"

,85

EDUCATION.: III : The School and 'the Adolescent(;bt 3 hours per week '

.;; ',;;<' This'course'coverS the following br'O'ad 'a.'re'as:

(a) The N.S. W. educational system, its organisation, structure, examination system, etc.

(b) ,1,\ ,st~4y of the apolescent: intellectual, social,' emotional, physical,

. ~ , . "moraldeve\opment. " ' ' ,(; ,

(c) ,The pupil-teache'rrelationship in the secondary schooi",', ',l',

Assignments and Essays - Assignments, of apprp~. 600,",,~OOO words each, ,are required e"Very"th'ree weeks.' \, '.,''; '~' ' "

~ '''. " /) .)

T ~~t, ~q~~'fJ ::,' " , '.',' Connell, W. : The Foundations of Education.

; ~" \. ..

,Method o{ As.s~ssznent, .. Cont.inuous evaluationthroligholit the year, by assi.~e~~'~0~~andby",clas;,~e8ting. iii ;'J:: '," 'if':

I ,I , t ~ ~-i -.\ Jr'

Not offered in 1999. , ,- . '.: ," .'.":." ,,'.

" ~:, ; :.: ::; :)U ;',

. : ~ j .~;

HEALTH 'EDUCATIQN ' III i.~, 1 r ,"', .

1 h6ur per ~~,ek , ", ',' ,)

Refer to Teacher's Certificate 2-year Geography/Commerce Health Educatio~Jl ;(}),.~l). "

INDUSrRIAL ,ARTS, ,Ill l7h6uz.s per week

Part;(il': Grafts III 2 hours per week

This cou,rse.,is plan.ne(,itQ ,pr.ovide the student with 'background know­ledge in weaving and to deve!opskilllilby using' various lobr.ris~

, .' .t'(. ~ . .':-. ; "j U.

Tbe"couTsewill inClude: '. i, ", i'l '/ l: '." (a)Srh~fdutline of 'history arid dev~l~pment of weClyipg~ (b) Simple wea Yin g on card "·~nd boa rd, loom$. ' , (c) Importance of Tabby wea:v~'. "',' , (d) Weaving itermS and accessories. ' (e) Tabby weave on braid and scarf loom'~'~~iier lQ~rn: ~~(t two shaft

loom. ," ' ., I.'

(f) Work on four-shaft loom: (i) Twills.

(ll) Patterns and pattern drafting. .t'.:

Practical work will be carried out during lecture:s.:

ASSignments and Essays - Practical w~rkb~gun itllectures will be c oroplet~d ,a..", 8:*1;1;1 ignm~nt s • ' ' ! i " I ~ i ' ': " , " i

I ~' .':.' :,' '. " • ..... • •

. :"" iT'ext; Books :", ," . ~'1 •

Department of Educati()h';: Weaving s!Yil~b~s';.' , ~ .': r I ~

:''':.I.t:\ .:'.:' ! '-,- \

~ . ./J .. .. ' , , ('

, : .', ' : r; ~. ,J t'.: .!,;' /:', r: ') '; '., !. q ,,'!": ';' .. ~

;:,.: "

< •• : \.' • .:.

Page 89: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

Reference Books: Atwater, M. M. : Shuttle Craft Book of American Hand Weaving. Simpson and Weir: The Weaver's Craft. Reed, N .A. : Book of School Weaving •. Worst, E. F. : Foot-power Loom Wea·ving. Black, M.E. : Key to Weaving. College Libra.r.yat1·4:5.·

'~ .'

Method of Asse~sment - Assignme~ts and p~ogre$sive evaluation.

,lj>a,t -!ii), : ;D,rawing and Design III ~ '.hours per week

;,' ;.,.,,,~; :," TQ.~'-P\lrPP.s~ of this course is to inte'grate the students' knowledge ("" o;(mathemati'cs, physics and mechanical drawing so as' to form a sound basis

for further study le~ding to the design of, ~~.~h;ine components, machines and structure:s':>');" "~',l,~},' )'" ,,', ;' " .. " "

;, ','j '\'/ C,(;I': tn t;ide:r'to"keep the students'uptQ',~~:r.e,quired ;~taJldil,r~!infall :,,1>

phases of the work in this subject, revision will be 'carried out at any time, e. g. , a solid, positioned on a double inclined plane, short~st',di'~taIice between non-coplanar lines etc .'/, :,r' ,', <"HI','" ,,:,'

• 'I' :;:;T~~etAA,$,ic,!prj·n!QipJ:es' and cur:rettt'practice inEil~ine'eringp~~;~~ w~ll be explained during lectures. Sometypfcal'designproblenis'will be 'solved on the chalkboard during the first term. Thereafter the students ar,e r~9ruiX:E!dto find more and more information for themselves, " ,i."': •

Students will be required to submit repOrts·oneach ~rojeC:t. The reports will include all calculations am either a full set of detail drawings, an assembly drawing or a free hand drawing as required~', The appropriat~:~ Australian Standards will be used for limits and fits. gears, 'pressure' ve~sels, keys and keyways and materials. , " "" ;.;

<.':"'; • .r"::r!~·.='&":,' ': .':\·'.~(r(.;.,,~·'r~.::, ':: ~ .. ':',: , '." :: ... .' :.,J , .. ' . - .. ' . . 1",:', ,,:

, The follOWing topics will be studied, not neces'sarilyi'ri the order" given:

Elements of Design - Factors of Safety- allowa.blestress'" ultiiriat~~, stress. ,"r . :':: ' ,;

Types of loading - static, suddenly applied .sh,ock, .flu~t,uating -examples. ." " " , "I: "

Limits and Fits - surface finishes. " ";< qra,pru,<:,f'l,repre,s,entation 0:£' sine and CO 'sme cUrVetC;

},,~, ;, Graphi,~al, dij:f~;t'lenti~tion and integration.

i,

. \'

Solution of problems relating to simplestructurespy gr,aphical and analytical methods. Sh~er ~o,rce a~d '1;>ep,ding mome,nt diag~ams. Stre s:s' criflc entration, fatigu,e, C r~e p. . i., i'

Range of materHlls used fn'Engine,e'ring~: ' ,", ' The locations of centroids ~eterm,ined, b,Y :gr~phic~lrp.ethqds -moments of inertia. ", '. " '" , " ", " ' .. ", '; , ':' ·Eqill.1ib:Hi.iin::bf;c6pla.n:a~' ~ri~ ~o~ copia~r' 'forc~s~ , ," Bending and direct stress. Belt gearing. Riveted Joints - Pr. W elded joint~ ,',.' ."

DeSign of, ~h~#ing. Transmission screws.

, t I

.' ~.j!. '·,J.~T .. '.' , ;', , ."i·~ ::~.r, '.~.'. ", ,",\: .. ,·"\':.i ff: '!i .. ::":·;·; ,:-: . . ,,' .. ~ ".'

The major portion of the final examination wOrk: in thfs· subject will ' be determined by a project involving the application of thep~ip.ciPl.e,s' taught in this subject in a more comprehensive sit~tiop..,

• :::. \ ~' :. ,.. l

These projects will incorporate, in varying degrees, combination of analysis, ingenuity, proportioning of parts, use of codes, drawing and

Page 90: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- ,87

.~.~'r~,~hi~g"1(sp~ci£icat~ons •. selec tiori. of materials , : safetY'conside rations. economl,'c f""",tQrs life e~p:ectanc"~.; ::. ,.,:,." . i .. ' j,;: .... ;"'.:::':.1">. ·,l.' :..-.': "."

"tt ,\.,~.\ ~~"" ,,"' • 1"

.'! ff:: i ipraCttcal work '*lil b~~~~rled o~t in each lecture. < ",", ,:.: -.' -'. ','.

ASSignments and Essays - Pra.ctical wQr~ coml1il:enced in; lectures will'be ciorripH~tedas:assignmeri:ts'~: ' ....

:. ,-' .

~ . ( ."

Text Books: Steel, G. and Fitness, E. W. Descriptiye Geometry anc:i Drawing,

Senio:r Book. ;

Reference Books.: . . Faires: Design of MachineEleme~ts. :~hig~~y ,: Mec,hanicalEngineering DeSign. .r,

,Sc:hca..um: MCI,chine, Design. Phelan: Machine Design. Beach: Machine DeSign. Hauk, M. C., Schaum: Descli>tive,Geomet~:y. '," , ',";":,':

,,'~ Abbot.' W~': Pra~;ti'c'al'Geome~iY 'and,En,gineer~ng,Gr~phic!s. Australian:En~n~ering'Drawi~gOf~ice,'~tc+~dardS C Zl. - 1966. B. H. P. Steel Shapes and Sections •.

Method of Assessment - Assi~rn~n~,s, ,p~6g;~~:~iv~ eyal~:~ion, and .. ",' ' .. ' , .. '. '.. . yearly examination.

" ,'.~ .:. \', :; , .:": '< "J.: ,(~: ':', " ' ;\,:

Part (iii) : Mechanics and Materials Science III ',1,:"'

6 hours per,weekvLG") ';"i"',, "'i,.:' " ,''';'

A study of technical advancement and ~ts .irn,pa.ct on mqdet'n society. ,', • . ,.~ .. :.>,., . ... . '. . ,_.- -"", - . ,

A detailed study of the structure of materi.ds'. Ihtrodileti'on of multiphase ma~erials c()v~r:ing ~etalsaIl4, ~el"'\Lmi~s.Thh,w;iP. lead up to and irichide wo:rkoh' coOting' curves and equiiibri~m diagrams lCf. s applie,cl"t,o.,mUiti"; phase materials. Treatments that can be applied to both fe,rrou,s an~ non-~e,l"r()u.s!,metals-.to: ob,taih desired.'properties., . ," . " •. ' .• ;,/,::' ." '., ,

. ...,. ", '. "".' ., ;'", "': L" ,,:< .)J'.'> ~.~) r,,<":'" "JJS

.... ' " 'Condltiorts'of equilibriu:m, moment of ,a force, couple ~y~tem:$. ,: Resultarit'ota.' system of 'ho~co~cu,rrent coplanarfor,ces: and free body,(Uagrams.

,;3 ~Di:scuss- .Q,if£.erent .. types of sbtuctures and sele:cf suitable ni~t~rial~" for constructional purposes. ': .. " .

Laboratol1Y wor.k will be carried out in lectures.

]O,Assi,gnments and Essays ;.;;Laboratory work comme need iii lect'\,lt'es will be completed as assignments~ Writtenassignrnent of 2000 words oli" , History of Teclu;tQlogy due fouz:tp, ;..,,~~~ of each terp1.. ,:' ,': i"; ,

.~: .:", ". ,'f, '. , • . I • \ ; •• " '. '\ .,' .,':' ) ") .,.; . I .' " I .

Text Bo,oks: ", ,-. . ~'ilj II i L :)(F" :', '\,

Van Vlack : Elements Of'!l\t1ait'E{rita:iS Sch~nee~' . Rollaeon: Metallurgy for Engineers>; ':, Beer and Johnson: Vector Mechanics for Engineets. Fyrth and Golds:r,nitll;: ,SGi,eq.c:e J:;Iist,c>ry ,and Technology • . -:'" . . '. .... '" .'"

'~ ;~~ferenc~ ;BoR~~\:i") :','1 :;'_':':; ". ~i ::. .

,. 'Co~lege ffl>;~~,~y\a:t 92g,~6~h::6~0.,~.i{ f. "

'l,-j

f. : .~. .: , .!', 'j ~"; .-... • , '. . ". ~ ;. • j.J .' • • •

. : ,Method,ofAs·sess;ment ..; Assign:ilients~progressive eVa.'ltiatihn, ," ,:'. ') ,! .

yearly examination.

Part (iv) : MetalWQrkilII ., ;) -j ,:

3)10U:Z:-~ p~r we~k <'" .'i' i,i 'l' t ., ' }."' -" '.,

. ',I i

During third year all of the' procedures and techniques taugh~ in MetalVVP1:t'k;I,and' 11 'shall: be' ,fu tther' developed'. 1'\" ,.' . '

and

Page 91: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

88

_," ;I'l~e :ly.lE1~lwO,r,!tLl1l.yl~bu·~pre$cribed for the schools has'beetj :ailalysed and models selected to meet the needs of the students. The rnore dlpable:' students will be encouraged to pursue practical work Qf a more ambitious nature, applying prirldples' 01 bas·icdeiJign. .

'. ' . ." i th~dughout';the year emphasis will l>~' p~aced on ir~~roving teaching techniques. In this regard students are expected to prepare teaching aids specifically designed to assist in attaining a high degree of efficiency.

, (il.··/': (Irrst>ructionin'roomorganizaUon, rec~rding, marking, maintenance and requisitioning will be given. "

Practical work will be carried. out during lectures. ·7" ,

Assignments and ~ssays- IS.t Form Progranllrting, due June. The teacher's responsibility for. safe working in practical rooms - due 8th week of second term - 750 words.

.! ,-' . ',':

Text Books: Sydney Technical College Trade'Technology, Booksl and 2. Burghadt'and AXlerod : tvlachine Tool Operations. Moroney; A. : Metalwork.

Reference Books; ." cook~· w·~" :'0 raft16r Schools •.

Cook, W. : Metalwork for SchoolS. College Library at 660-671, 68?,

Method of A$'~~ssrri~"rit'~ prog~~:~sive

-: P~t·f Nl : Woodwork ill .' ~.hour.s"peri wee;~ , . . ... ' .: '. '. ';'.' .~ -.

evaluation •. '

i,'! 'This cbursei'is aiIne'd to reinforce proceduresa.~d techniques tauBht. in :W'o'odwork I a-tid: II. t.·.

The Woodwork syllabus prescribed for the ·schools has been analysed and models selected to meet the needs of the stude~ts. puplicated drawings are to be made ()f-ithese models and'students are:reCi,1li~e~ tQ:C;:;9,n$,t!Uct such

.o'cteaching aids as\vi'Uiensure a hi gh:"degree of ef.ficie'n'cY.StUdents will be eXPEfcte<ito attempt sele~ted;,tnode.1s :in:a-ddition to the r'equirenieiif-sof the schoolS curriculum. . '. • :., . ";, .

Lathe work C?f a ,Il).ore~dvanc,ed,nature will be attempted .

. . , ' ~nl;~l'~ction will be: giyeno,n'~he cilre, .maintenance:andsetting of all machU;ter,y us~din the school sitl¥.l-tion .:.; , . ': '. .

More capable students will be"pe:tmitt~dto select a:dditional work from the following topics as prescribed in the Woodwork syllabus:

1. Elementary C~l'peq.try an4Joinery. ..~.

2. Elementary Boat Buildin,g .• ,,<., 3. Eleme:q,tary:Pa~tez:n lVia19q.g .. , ." .. " .' .

Practical work willbecari"ied' out'd,rtihg lectures.

Assignments and Essays - Organization of tools ancima~e~ia:1s in the woodwork room - length: 6 foolscap sheets· ~. duef6urth ~eek of second term. ']:'he. value of ch~:rts and teaching aiqs - len,gth: 6fo.olscap sheets -due'e'nd 'bI ~e'~ond ter'xn .. ' . . '. :" ." ," .

Text Books: Walton, J.A. : \Yoodwork in Theory andPta¢tice. ..' . \Vallis, N. K. : Australian Timber Handbook (Timber Development

:Ass. of Au~tralia). Gray;: T':!A.:' and lV.i.cCorn:!.ick, T ••. Schoo1,Certifi:cate' WoodwoTk'c"

Page 92: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

89 .

Reference. ,Books:,.:,., .":, .. !.::-Li j ") •• :,' ,./. _ .

Grone~an~;~~:€-~H~'i Glazn-e'1'~' E~J:t.-·:"TechniCaI Woodworking. N. Y. : /,',"" I;'~';i;"';~ ',';, '. . £.4cGra.w-Hill, 1966.

". ~ 1 .1 ,_ ~"' ... ' "' ...... ".- -'.' . Feirer, J. L~ : Wotydwork1ngiofIndu·str'Y •. nlinois : Bennett, 1963. Fastnedge, R. : English Furniture Styles from 1500 to 1830. , .... .' Hax-mondswort4 ~ Penguin, .1955. Men:~~J:~,H.A~ :C~n~ern'porary ~Nood Fur~iture. Illinois:, McKnight,

•. :. ,J! : "... 'l 961. ..

. Cqllege Libra~y at 684~690~'

IVIethod.'o£ Assessment - Progress~ve evaluation.

MA THEMA TICS, III,

Not offered in 1969.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION III - r

An Extension of Secondary School Games '. . ~ ., . .

1 hour per week ........... ~,.-.--.-.-.-..... ~-.. --.-. "'- ...... " , .. , ... .

:Athletics - Measu:rement - official duties • ........ -...... Swim.ming.andLife Saving. ;, '.' Major Garries .:. Aus '-Rules, Cricket, Racquet Games, Rugby .... _. ____ _

-- .. ·----··-·-0 rganization of'CarfiiVals-:-'---------'---·-~-··-· .. ··· ... . ..... " ......

Weight and Circuit Tr~ining. . .... .,.;,; .. ~: .. ).:: 'i r;~ ,,; , I i"_

Competition Draws. n' .• · I .,;;t) .:'

Minor Games - Lead up Games to Major Games. , .. j'" ,;',j Elementary Gymnastics.;,~) rj;" ub; ... 'JJ2 .. C}~

Umpires' Certificates., .,,-,'i:, Ht!.', lJ.:,,'eU l

Practical work - Practical application of major games!~ athletic~-,>etc • . 'I' ext Books : Department of Education: Handbook for Swimrriiri'g Instl'\1ct~!.s~ Reference Books: Official Rule Books. Physical Education Co-op. : Trackcnd Field.

_ .. _._ .. __ D~pa:r~m.e-p,t-gtEduca.tion. ::the Games Book. R. L. S. S. Manual 1968 Edition.

Method of Assessment - Unit method.

SCIENCE ill : Chemistry 3 hours per week ..

Elementary Laws of Chemical Combination. Elementary Theory of Electrovalency and Covalency. Acids, bases and salts, treated from an ionic standpoint. Chemical activity of the elements. Corrosion of metals. Electrochemistry. Physical properties of the elements related to structure: .... , .. ' I

Physical and chemical properties of compounds in the Perlodic.i, .. i.,; _

System'. Elementary Organic Chemistry.

Practical work shall be related to the topics listed above. " .............. ,.".,.,~ .. ", ,-~.,~ .... ~-. ,-.-,-, ~ ........ ," ., -, ..... ~"' ..... ~... , ... ~." -

Reference Books: . ___ ..... Ja st;rze b~kivL. D ... -: NatUreand·Properti es of Engineering' Materials.

Sienko, M. J. and Plane, R. A. : Chemistry.

Method of Assessment - Study guides shall be issued through the year. Tests, of one hour's duration each, shall be based on the study guides. Three tests shall be given in each term.

Page 93: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

I

90

ALLOCATIONS OF LECTURE HOURS 'TO SUBJECTS' -:' '.J ,/ 'f' .' ,

DIPLOMA IN ART .EDUCATION.

This course is conducted jointly by-the Newcastle Teachers' College and the' National,Airt School, Newcastle Technical College Branch.

Student teachers doing this course will be required to do practice teaching at the end of each of the first three years and three periods of practice teaching in the final year.

Vlork in a second teaching subject, History, is compulsory.

The course outline is as follows:

'. ~ ,r f . '. ~:",". '. .

"TEACHERS'COLLEGE COMPONENT

HOURS PER WEEK SUBJECT !

Y,ear I ., Year II ; Year III I Year IV

Art & Craft Method & Demonstrations Education English Health Education Physical Education .History. & Method

Total Hours I,' .t"!; ". ,f '.:"

i'

.,j·:""4 2

'2 .

.

'! I

I I I I

I I . Ii

4 i i

2 r 2

'. --2 I .

i 10

. ' .... ~.

I

NATIONAL ART SGHOOL COMPONENT.

HOURS PER

4 T 4 3 !. 3 2 n 2 ;!

li, - I 1

- i 1 2 I 4

],

II 11,.· ·1 16 'I Ii

'. ,::.: :)', .:.

'WEEK

I SUBJECT I

Year I rYear IIII Year 1111 Year IV I , .. II I I ··I~a1itt.! ~~ Paint s'cuIp ! I ! . ' l .

Design 3. , .3 I ) .. " .. :: . ',; ~ ! 3 ,. . . .. Drawing !). 4 .5 5 i 3, , '" J .,.'

Painting 2 3 I

Composition 3 3 3 3 .II 3 3-D Design II 3 3 I· History of Arts ,II 3 t 3 3 3 :1 3 3

" " f'" ..

I Graphic Art I 3 5 5 Ii ·1

Sculpture' ;

! 3 II 3 ! Ceramics

J. 1 ,. 3 3 'I

·1

.. . II Jewellery I Ii 1 1

I i '. :" . :

i !I ..

I

:1 Total Hours I 19 19 19 19 .. 13 13

1 ~. , . ...... ; \, ... ,\ "

~ i! . \ I \ ." :

Page 94: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

, ,':..

1. An Honours Diploma will be awarded to students who ~u.ccessfullycomplete the prescribed course of study for one additional ful1~time year after"the completion of the normal four-year course leading to the Diploma in Art" ,Education.

,}J The pz:esc:ribed.cour~e "of study Will be a,s follows:

Section· I: Advan'cec:f'Thebretical Studies: Part 'f'-Art Education~ Part 2 - Art History and Appr'eciation.

'Section'II A'ResearchProject Each candidate will be required to write a substantal )the~l:I based :\lpon a, research projeot, approved by the Joint Standing Committee, in the fiel4 of art education.

Section III Further Practical Study Each candidate will be required to unde:rtake,fv;rther practical art study as prescrib~d by the Head 9f, the

:", :';'" f;,,: ": Natidricit.l Art ,school. ,,' , 1·'\"

Candidates will be required to complete all ,thz:,~~ se,ctions at an advanced ~ , ~ ~ . ."'< ,:" :,:~ .', :":,, ., '!':'~"'!'.!. ,,: ' '. i~' ,',' "

, : \'

3. Each candidate who wishes to be admitted to the honours~ year ~hal1~C!<ls':) application through the Principal of the Teachers' Collegetoth~J.om,t.,:~_~-d?~ Standing Committee in the final year of the four-year course and before

," dR~~}jpv:~w.~e~,:ot:'l~~t;,y~r,,,'L; 'f),eventI c" ; "",.j" ':) ;':i,;::.'~,:-""i" , " .},.].i, .. , '1""\ T': ".] :'';},:.: . .. ,r( ... i ..... .') .. r.~,~f~ ... h(l'" ·:::l':,~··"f(iir:~ .. \.') ,~'i.(,;,,':J,; 1:""", :;"'[f,r;".r ~:>y;·r . .'.." r, "':":!, •· • .Il: ... , .,. , .••

~r·T~~;"f~~,~~t~~4i~glG~:trirnitt~e;sha.Ude.cide whether"ornata c3:ndlda.te f~'\\iL shall be admitted to the honours year, and the dEfci'slon."of the Joiht :standing Committee shall be fina,l..,~",;, " il;,J,J(l ' ,ij ;,!

,.\ r) , ,;'~:"; (:) ( ~ ';'.t".~ r:c" . i .:; ~t. " ' ! ~. ' .i c j , , ..

~.:' .:;x : :'.:" '. S. The Joint Standing Committee's decision shall take into ac;count the

applicant's overall performance in the final examination fo,:r,t~e :piploma, general art achievement, course record, and proposed .. ar .. ~~ ofre~search, as well as any other matters the Joint Standing Committe,e d,~ems relevant.

--:1. " .; 6. Applications submitted through the Principal of the Teachers' College

s,~all indicate~D,general terms the, re sea'rch pr<>je<:t 'wh'ich'th~ 'applicant ha~ iQ. mind,t,o."underta:~e:.:rhisstatement, howeV'e'r,sh~dl)not bebindfng " on th~,s~:~~,~t,~~p. t~e,firlCl.l,selection ,of the project'and the :pa'rts'io:flhe .. cours~'t~'b~ studied will be approved by the Standing,Commitre)efafiJr"i' applicants admitted to the honours year have had .Qppor~l'lit.y tro,L4i$cUSS their proposals with the He~d of the National ,ArtSchoo,l. ~nd, ,tlle l?;rincipal of the Teachers' College.' , ',;,' ",.. ": ':!Ol:;"

~ ,", . :(( i,,' . . .' .. :' ", ~:';

,:.'i·, .'

i ~"1 c~.r:f ./;.,:'-J ~,j ~~,~. ~:,1~ "~-"'-'-'---'--'---~"'''----'-'.'-'--'''~~'

':-j~j, .. ;\}.1 ".r:::)('~' 2..:~.f)t.,;;"

Page 95: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

'92 ---

DETAILS. OF;. ,SU;J;\JE;Cl'S. PRESCRIBEDFQR J)IPLOMA IN ART EDUCATION _ ._., .... ~ . .e".

'PART' 1· ., " '.:' YEAR" i:

ART- ;r!:'AH' N.\.ethod 2 hours per week

Understanding crea.tivegrowthof child through art expression at pre­school and Infant school levels •. Study and discussion of .scribbling shapes, representation of human figure • concepts of space ,emotional approach to colour and three dimensional experience.

Demonstrations of teaching methods designed to meet.the child's needs.

, .. "

Prac~ic~l wpr·k -Casehistories collected and studied •

. ,je· TeXtBooks: Tomlinson: Children as Artists,. , ,; I

, 'i.;R:ef~renc'e BbOks:" ... '~ " : .. ,".':'. .' '" ";t.()w~hifjeld"and B'rit'talD. : 'Your Child and His Art.Creative & Mental

Greenberg :, Children's Experiences in Art. .' Growth.

-'l\rlethod of'Assessrrieht';~Sh~~t~ss~y~,:'~ne 'per t~r~. One lllajor assignment. third term.

,;·'i'. ,. 1; "

CRAFT (11= Crafts' i ,1 , 2 hours per\ve~k' .. :;,"

,·t'

This course is designed to provide the opportunity for'Art students to . -< .. ," ~ ,

gain experience in the use of a large range of tools, equipment and materials. It may :vary ~r9~ y~,ar. tQ ,y~rdepe,n<Ung.: on: .the'equipment. accommodation

. ~yailable ,and th~ requir~ment$; ,of -students. . , ' , " ,.' .. ' .. , .. ' .. ,,,.

, .'.

In the main, items chosen from the following crafts may be made: Weaving -'Basketry

" Puppetry Leatherwork " Woodwork Bookcrafts.

'. ,y" -: ;: .... '

. !,!."

A!Jsignmentsand ;Essays:- Written aSSignments coricerrled with the cla,.~sfoom 'applic!"ti<:lll and construction of practical exercises arEf to be .' subm~ttec;l at various time$ ,du]1ing the year to·coihcide with the completion of practical .exerci,s~$\. . . . . , .

. 'Reference BookS: . , Sihlpson and vtlelr:' The Weaver's Craft. Crampton. C. : Canework. Walton, J.A. : Woodwork, Theory and Practice. Groneman, C. : Leatherwork. Lay. J. : Leatherwork.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

EDUCA TION I : Educational Psychology Secondary (c) 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.4) from which a selection of topics is made.

Page 96: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

93

ENGLISH I Z hours per week

,',.: ...... ,f-

Part (i) : Literature - History of the Novel

.t.. . . ~;The·developm:ent of the, modern realis,ticno'Vel'·fromits earliest beginning. Innovations to be examined will include Defoe, Swift, Rkhardstm, )fielding, , Smollett, Sterne, ,Walpole and Radcliff~ ,.Scott,J\':l.~t.et:l,., the Brontes,

. ::]jickeris·,'~Thackera.y, Eliot~ Lawrence. J6Yce. Huxleyand"representative moden novelists. Students will be expected'toread from the writings of all innovators but five novels will be studied intensively. These will be Joseph Andrews, The Mill on the Floss, The Return of the Native, A Portrait of the' Artist as a Young Man,' andiPointJ Counter Point. ;'

PraCtica:l wo~k ~' regula'~ ~e~ding assigil~~nts. ,.. . i " : ':. .'} ,', ; •. t : , ~-. :'. ',: ':'1, L i:'I'~'2 ,: ... :: ~., '.: ,: '. '.:'> : ,', " ' Assignm.ents and Essays - C?P~;"ffi't~f eS$ay 0(l,50Q word~due in':;2

July. Regular reading aSSignments and class exercises. All students must deli ver three seminar pa:.per~·s ." :"! \S~ .! i:t I': .: ';~: V .,:(.~ :,;';' '.t~: : ','

Text Books: See above .. :" .: .' . ~

Reference Books: ... . ;, " "'J .,,;-: " 0;)

Cambridge History pf)PP:~li~hL~te:raqlr:~,~:.c.,:,' I"~ " :."

Kettle. A. : The :English Novel. Libbock~ 'p;·:.::;.Craft of ,Fiction. ' y'!.

Saintsbury, G. : Short History of English Literature.

Method of Asses~in~~i: -cht~S:;e·~~brtsil;·;i:~~·~~·inar'~~l?~~'~~;L~:~~~i? final written examination.

. ," , ,,': .. r:;

Part (ii) : Oral Expression 1 hour per week ".' ____ .... _ "L .. '.~ ,nJ),' '.L!:i..::~.'_:':~J~i:J :,., iT' " LI .:,

\ • , \ .'.. ~ _, ; ( ...... ~.l

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - Z-year - Geography/Commerce (p. 36):·~·/ .c£::" ,c:J ~)'I':':', .... "",! )':: )(',. ,': C) ': '::

HEALTH EDUCATION I \., .... 1.:.-

Not offered in 1969. " ~~ .t'~.~ '.: :.).Y:',i 2 <.:: .!:·~t"; .'; _ :. : ": .. ,"

,,:.(:".' ';,-

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I

Not offered in 1969.

SOCIAL SCIENCE I : History - General 3 hours per week

. ." .,. '. ".: ;-:,;.! ::/' '.;", " : .. '",

.: ' 1. A general overview of world history to provide asirnple· frarriework

for later study. " .. ,. " ,

Z. "Posthole" studies of sele-ded th~m~s~Je~ g. social classes,~ulture, ~ '(-~tteligi()n.. u'.rbaniz~ti.onia;gr'iculture,' lndu'stry, governmentifrom a

variety of times and places. '"I'l,:!"

ASSignments and Essays - Three 400-worq revie.w~ pfjourll-al, :,':: .'.. ,.. .' "'" .... ~. "." . .., " ,"

articles in first term. Five 400-word reports on posthole"studieSlIpread-' throughout second and third terme;.'

Text Books: : ,'. • ;":., .:!.'

To be supplied.

Reference Books: To be supplied.

lviethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

," , . I,'

. ,~'.! : ~ cr ;.' 1.

---------------.... --.------~ .---.. --.. ------... - .. -.--------.----.--.... -~------

Page 97: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART II YEAR II

ART II : Art £v;:ethod 4 hours per week

94

, i .1. ,; .!..:

; , f',roblems of pre-adolescents and adolescents in art expression will ,b,e;,o,pliJerved and discussed.

\ '

Demonstration of 'teaching techniques and' mec!fia. tbnieet their ~eed.s.

Exhibition and evaluation of work in the school.

Use of visua.l aids.' ;.l

History of Art Method will include demonstration and discussion of lesson types. Specific study of non-E:uropean ~rt to illustrat e. ,

Practical work - Visits to gall~ries, museum. Excursions. west spea'kers. ColleC7,tion of case hiEitories~,:; ,

ASSignments and Essays - Fortnightryassignment.

Reference Books: Lowenfeld & Brittain : Creative and Mental Growth. Richardson: Art and the Child. Cole : The Arts in the Cla.sroom. World of Art Series ': Oceania, Australia.;

,";

Method of Assessment - By £,ortnightly assignment.,

EDU CATION II : IVlodern Educational Practice (b) 2 hours per wiee'k'

.. ~ : . ,

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - W1a.thematics (p.48).

ENGLISH II : Cultural Studies in Literature 2 hours per we,ek

\ . .~ r '. • '. .~ ' .•.•

The study of prescribed books including modern novels, plays. poems and shol"t stories.

Practical work - Regular reading assignments'. .,'

ASSignments and Essays - One major essay~ dassexercises, seminars.

Text Books: Short Story Anthologies. The Old Man and the Sea. The Grapes of Wrath. Point Counter Point. Ibsen': ,1'h ree Plays,. Oxford Book of English Verse. Green : A~thology of Australian Verse.

(. . " ""

-: .~'" '

MethOd ofAssessment~ C14se exere.ises; ,seminars; pne essay; final written examination.

HEALTlf'" ':EDUCATION Ii' Not offered in 1969.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II

Not offered in 1969.

. .. \ .. , { " : ~ :.. ..

Page 98: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

SOCIAL SCIENCE II 2 hours per week

-'-- 95

i .. I •••

The course will cover History from Renaissance times to the "eiid,of the War of American Independence. It will consist of major themes such as

, European Renaissance, . ' ,.',' 'The Eur'opean and English Reformations, '.

~xploration and Discov~ry i~ the New World, Colonization and Revolution in North America.

-." '

, ,A.ssignments and Essays- Each studept will endeavour ,to teCl,ch ,tile other members 9fhis sub~group the results of hj.s investigation of the topic' which he has studied. This will involve the preparation of'

(a) discussion sheets, " . ' (b) questions for study and

.' (c) summaries:. . '":':., , .

The effectiv~nessof the ,teaching will be examined in each sub-group • >, ,., ".. • •

, ,by eC;l.c.h student reporting his reaction to, the sel,'llinar itself. :... . . "

Reference Books: ' Supplied individually:

. ,", .

Method of Assessment - Evaluation, will be car!ied out by means of reporting seminars and submitted written work •

. : ,- :' .

. J .: . '} ~

Page 99: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART ill YEAR III

ART III : Art Method 4 hoUTS'pElJ:week

. '

" ,.96

': ' .... ! ';! i ':.

; ", ..... .-~ .

This course is designed to cover all A~t subj~ctsfrom Form I to Form 6 and will include manag~ment, .orga:nisation and theory of methods.

Practical work - Some practical work with teaching methods. , '

Assignments and Essays - Library study - Creativity (approx. 1000 words) ~ 'flrstterm:~ 'Lecture note's'on method (end of each t€31"ttl) :..: third term. Libra;:ry study - Historyof Art - approx. 1500' words. Library study:" Art" ' Theories - approx. 1500 words -' second term. '

Reference Books: Eisner, E. W. and Eaker, D. W. : Readings in Art Educatio~. Read, Herbert: Education Through Art. ,

, ~·LoweD.feld·:and~Brft·ta.iri;: :C'reative'and'Menial Growth·.··.J··'· de Sausrnarez, Maurice : Basic DeSign - The Dynam:its iof Visual Form. Kepes, Gyorgy: Language of Vision.::)) NlcFee, June King: Preparation for Art. ,:. " Lr,~ Kenny, John B. : Ceramic Design.

': " . .-r .. . " .... :' , "

;Scott,' R.G. : Design Fundamentals. ·"1 ':.i :",

Method of Assessment - ASSignments - written tests on theory.

EDUCA TION III 3 hours per week

Part (i) : Educational Psychology (b) Z hours per week

Refer to 'leacher's Certificate - Z-year - Primary Teaching (p.4).

Part (ii) : Modern Educational Practice (b) 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - Z-year - Geography/Commerce (p.40) from which topics will be selected.

ENGLISH ill : Literature of the Twentieth Century Z hours per week

The course aims 1. To introduce students to the changing tecmiques of Twentieth Century

literature, i.e. Novel, Poetry, Drama. Z. To investigate the influence of social, cultural and ideological concems

of this century upon its literature. 3. To encourage discrimination in reading and integration of literary studies.

ASSignments and Essays -(a) Seminar - agreed times during second term. (b) Compilation and analysis of bibliographical and critical lists relevant

to individual reading courses. (c) Short class exercises.

Text Books: Twentieth Century writers included in prescribed lists for Level I

Higher School Certificate Literature - additional reading designed to meet students' needs and interests.

Reference Books: Periodical Literature Relevant sections of Colle ge Library.

Page 100: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

97

Method of Assessment - Seminar, class exercise's, annual examination.

SOCIAL SCIENCE III : History - European 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year Soci~l science II (p.43).

.. ,),. , ~ ',1

,,~ \ -. \

! (r

Geo gra phy / C omme rce

... '.',. ;, :~! ! ," " .

~. " ; ~ . .

Page 101: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

98 '---'-

PART IV·. ·,YEAR·lV . ...• · .. d .. ,

ART IV Art lviethod 5 hours per week

I. Th.e., .~urth yep.r CO'~.lr~e. will consist . mainly ~. teaching practice and applying theories and methods in the actual school situation. Students will be expected to write programme s, teach methods, te st pupils and mark papers ~so:that: they will gaiu confidence in their own knowledge and teaching ability.

In addition to the above supervised teaching practice the course will include discussions, libra:ry Gtudy J educational visits and assignments.

Pract,ical work - Teaching practice including research.

Assignments and Essays - Third term - written account (approx. 3000 words) on research obse:rvations and experiments conducted during teaching practice. Second term. - lecture note s, etc., containing a complete set of teaching methods. Third term " progressive lessons programmed for one term.

Reference Books: Eisner, E. W. and Eaker. D. W. : Readings in Art Education. Read, Bel"bert : Edi.~.cation Through Art. Lowenfcld and B:rittain : Creative and Mental Growth. de Sausmare::;, Ma.urice : Basic Design - The Dynamics of Visual Form. Kepes, Gyorgy: Language of Vision. McFee, June King: Preparation for Art. Kenny, John B. : Ceramic Design. Scott, R. G. : Design Fundamentals.

Method of ASGes~"ment ~ Assignments - written examination on theory.

EDU CA TION IV 3 hours per week

Educational Ps~!=hology

This course examines the contribution of the study of psychology to the understanding of such topics as the learning process, teacher-pupil relationships, individual differences, methods of evaluation, adolescence and the relationship between. education o.nd mental health.

Assignments and Essays - Four 1500 word essays and one seminar to be presented by each student. Due dates - 18th April, 27th June, 8th August, 3rd October.

Reference Books: Lists of refereaccS will be issued during the year.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

ENGLISH IV : ~ackground and Perspective in Twentieth Century Literature 2 hours per week

Aims of the Coul'se: To extend students' knowledge of Twentieth Century Literature in its three main fields of Poetry. Drama and the Novel.

It is intended that the social and ideological background of the period should be explored as the basis of the thematic and technical concerns of present day literature oi England, America and Australia.

Some comparative studies involving European literature will be attempted, and perspective and depth provided by exploration of some persistent or recurring themes pursued from their simplest origins to their highly sophistiscated and complex presentations.

Page 102: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

99 ---

Assignments and Essays -(a) Essay 2000 words due September. (b) Seminar - agreed times during second term. (c) Compilation and analysis of bibliographical and critical literature

relevant.tp topics. ir

Text Books: .; • ~. :- J

No set texts - individual :!:'eadililg courses designed to meet students' needs and interests. .' .' . .

Reference Books: Periodical literature. Cunliffe, M. : Literature of the United States, Penguin, 1954. Trilling, L. : The Liberal.Imagination. London, Merc~ry, 1961. As advised in lectures. .

Method of Assessment - Assignment, seminar, annual examination.

HEALTH EDUCATION IV : Health Education 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.20).

PHYSICAL EDUCATION IV : Principles and Practice of Secondary P. E. 1 hour per week

A study of the general principles and practice of Physical Education, team games and sports together with regular practical experience related to the teaching of Physical Education and supervision of sport in schools.

Practical work - Practical application of all major games including dancing.

Method of Assessment - Unit work tests.

SOCIAL SCIENCE IV : Asian History 4 hours per week

(p.43). Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce

Assignments and Essays - 5000 words - due end of second term.

Text Books: To be supplied.

Reference Books: To be supplied.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Page 103: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

100 ,-.--

PART V YEAR V

EDUCATION V Education. and <l:'he.~is " ["'" ,,: .. , .,,' ".~'.l:):::.:'

Discussion of the thesis topic will inevitably raise' educational and psychological issues. These wi 11 be integrated into the ~be.siswork.

j {:.

. {

" Practical\vork '- Research iri':schoOlS:.

Assignments and Essays - Thesis - 10,000 + words.

Reference Books: As ~ppropria~e •

. Method of Assessment

; . i"

.. R'· ~: .' J, .

"r,

:'"r ':": . , , . ~

I, _. '. ci . ; ( '} ").(', 'f .~. r.: .:'": .. _ •. _~ .. __ ." .... ....... ,.L.~·'"~" ........ , .. _ .•.•..

::,' .

'.':" :"'r

d .. :,:J

,:., .. ,'!.: I .. ,:

I 1, (, ," ~. t c· . ,:'.' );,

:: .:.: 'J: "': ';' t.

'.i. ,

"'j::

,,,,," Y'.'Ie ..

.. ' .~.

Page 104: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

101

DIPL.Ql\tlA IN ART EDUCATION - TWO YEAR CONVERSION

PROFESSIONAL COURSE

Students with a Diploma in Art or other acceptable Art qualifications equivalent ~t least to those of four-year trained full-time students completing the Diploma in Art Education Course may qualify for the Diploma by under­taking successfully the following two-year courSe of full-time study at the. Teachers' College.

I: I \i Periods per week

SUBJECT !I

i II . Ii I i Yea.r 1 Year 2

I II I' iArt and C raft Method " 4 Ii 3 iEducation Ii 5 Ii 6 iEnglish and Speech II 4 II 4 II iHealth and Physical Education II 2 iI 2 lHistory of Art

II 4 II 3 1 " 1 IHistory Ii

ISecond Teaching Subject I, 3 Ii 3 il jl

!Demonstrations I: 2 Ii 2 I 'I :1

I I: ,! II

!;

Totals I: 25 II 24 " ! !: ,.

" I, II I

Note: It could well happen that those students attempting this course would have to take up their scholarships at Alexander Mackie Teachers' College, Darltnghurst.

Page 105: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

102 I" ---

ART CO~VE~SION COURSE, FOR TWQ-YEA~: TMINED TEACHERS

, ,,:.

By successfully compieti~gthe' co'nversion course set out below, two-year trained teachers may qualify for four-year trained status as Art te~~he~s.

, . H a sttident'swo~rk in the Natlonal Art Schoof component of the" ConversionCourse~is of Diploma Course qU::ality, it is possible that the studerit may·'qualifY fai-the Diploma in Art Education. ' ,

I i STAGE III I STAGE IV

NATIONAL ARt SCHOOL I I

-0, , .: I irpart I I Part n SUBJECTS

Part I Part:U' I I : ,'.;. I ,.lSculp. Paint '\ '" .. - , ...

" .. . .. ~ .... .. I

I: j I

Drawing - General 2 I ,I 1 , Drawing - Figure 2

, I !

Drawing - Life ,

2 I 1 ;

I! ,

Design , .

3 3 I

I Design - 3-D Z Z Z, Z Z Composition

I II I

. !

Compositionl Painting 3 3. I ! I

Painting - Life I 3 I

Painting - Portrait . ,~ ..•.. ........ .. - . I 3 Sculpture " II 3 Ceramics ~'-""

.. -, ... - ...... ... . "- ... " 3

Printmaking I :1 z I Z il I

Jewellery " I .1 1 r} ~ . '.", ' .. ' "! .. i

Art HiStory .' " ( ~. ';') ".'

1 1, 1" 1 1 I I ~ ! ' .... ,r I, '.

i "

Totals 11 11 ! 11 10 10 , I

The Teacher's College will take over the administmtion of its own component of this course in 1970, but the lectures will still be held at the Art School in Hunter Street.

Page 106: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

--- 103" ---.

ALLOCATl_O'N~i OF LECTURE HOURS TO SUBJECTS.

DIPLOMA IN MUSI<::: .. EDUCATION

T eac h ers , C 11 0 ege C omponen t II

."

I:Year lit: 'Year II·· Year III Year IV . ,' ...... -. ....

SUBJECT ! :1 ... !hrs/wk I,. h·]'"s/wk i hrs/wk hrslwk J • ,

! I I Education ! 1 ! 2 1 7

I

English & Speech 3 I 3 ! 2 I 6 ! I

Health Education I - i - - 1 Music, Choir, etc.

I 3 3 4 ! 5

Physical Education .... - - .( 2 ,', ....

Demons tations I 2-- 2 ,. . ,

2 ....

2 i ..

, .. " . , ! Totals 9 10 9 23

I i ] '.

'Coriservatorium 'CoIRt>6nent

! :1 Yea'±- 'ill Year Ii!l' Year III/Year IV', ' U Ii lL , SUBJECT

r.----'-,.-:,--'-' ._. _,_ .. _________ .j-!lhr~/w~·~II· hrst.;I~ .'hrs/.wl! ,hr~/wl', II ,r- II

Principal Study Second Study Harmony and Applied Harmony History and Analysis Orchestral and Choral Arranging Accompaniment Class Orchestra Class C~oi:r: i,.' T> ' '.' . String, woodwind, brass and

percussion class Director's class

Totals

. '\ . '

1 l' I I' I Ya Yz., Yz Va . t -

" 2 2 2 II -, 222 -

I , , I

2 2

I

10Ya

I 'I I! ' I I

~ I I

2 -2 2

- -- I

l2Ya '4~ . ':-

.'.~ ~{ ]:-'1 ........ ..

Page 107: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

104: ----

DETAILS OF • SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED.FOR DIPLOlVlA IN IvCUSIC

EDtJCATION

PART I YEAR I

EDUCATION I : Educatipnal Psychology Secondary (d) 1 hour .. per w.e.,ek

, Refer to 'Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Primary Teaching (p.4) from which a selection of 'tOpics is made. Seminars 'are not included in this course.

ENGLISH I 3 hours per week

Part (i) : History of the Novel 1 hour per week

Refe r to" Di ploma in: . Art Education- (p. 93) ~.-- ..

Part (ii) : Poetry and Drama 1 hour per week

t',: ;

Elements of drama and the. study of selest~d plays. " . .. , "'"'~'" ""., ... :~ ... ,:~.~~_\ ........ -.. " ..... -~... " .. " '.' .

,Elements o~ poetry and detailed study of selected poems.

AssignmentS'andEssays- 1000 words on Poet due beginning of second term.' Three'200 words on drama topics due before end of second term.

Text Books: Hayward: Penguin :Book of Modern Verse. Sha-k~speare·: 15 Plays. B,eck'et : 'Waiting for Godot. "-':' Of Casey : Plays, Volume I. I; "

Refe.rence Books: To be given in lectures.

, ."/',

~ ,','

. ~ ..

Method of Assessment - ASSignments and final written examination.

(p·fo6).

j

Part (iii) : Oral Expre s sion l' hour per week

HEALTH EDUCATION I

Not offered in 1969.

MUSIC I : Music in the School 2 hours pe r week + choir

". ,) '1 .. (,:

'. ~..:: ,.:: ,".

:: i J3,.:>

Method and content: As for Teacher's Certificate MUSic I (Primary Teaching (p.8) and Music: II (Infant Teaching) (p.32).

Choral class: Singing and conducting.

Record wo rk.

Text Books: Priestley and Fowler: Recorder Books I and II. Music Curriculum.

Page 108: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

"1' .....

105

Reference Books: Bavin : ,Percussion Band from A to Z. Eele : Listening Togethe,r. Library 780-789 •

. Method of Assessment - Progressive assessment through regular written and practical tests.

Page 109: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

106

PART II YEAR II

EDUCATION II : Modern Educational Practice 2 hours per week

I . .'.':' Reiert'o ,Teachel"s,oGertifica.tEi·- 'Z-yea,r Geography/Commerce (p.40). -::

ENGLISH II : Cultural Studies in Literature 3 hours per week

,i.E;"' . U ,i'X'"

Study of the development and techniques of the novel, short story, poetry and drama, with intensive reading of selected works from these areas.

Assignments and Essays - Three essay type assignments, one of 1500 words length (due early third term), and two of 750 words (due late second term and late third term).

Text Books: Sheridan: The Rivals. Say: The Beggars' Opera. Wilde: The Importance of Being Earnes~. Synge: Riders to the Sea. Thomas : Under Milk Wood. Eliot: Mill on the Floss. Hardy: The Return of the Native. Joyce: Portrait of the Artist. Waugh: Decline and Fall. Hemingway: The Old Man and the Sea. Murdoch: Australian Short Stories. Hayward: Penguin Book of English Verse.

Reference Books: To be given in lectures.

Method of Assessment - Assignments and final examination.

HEALTH EDUCATION II

Not offered in 1969.

MUSIC II : Music in the Primary School 2 hours per week + choir

Method and Content: As for Teacher's Certificate Music II (Primary Teaching p. 20). Programme planning.

Choral cla s s •

Recorder work.

Reference Books: Fiske: Listening to lViusic. Music Curriculum.

Method of Assessment - Progressive assessment through regular written and prac tical te sts.

Page 110: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

107

PART III YEAR III

EDUCA TION III : :E.;ducational Psychology (e) 1 hour per week

This course consists of selected topics from such fields as Educational, Developmental, and Social Psychology. It considers: ,

(a) the child's social, emotional and intellectual development; (b) the process o~ socialization; (c) the dynamics of formal and informal groups; and, ". . (d) reasons for and ways of changing the social structure of the

classroom.

. .A.ssignmen~s and Essays - Students will be required to complete three 500 wordassign?nent8dur~g the year (due 3rdApril,18th,Jun'e, 25th July).

Reference Books: DupUcated sheets listing suggested r,eferences wHl be issued during

the year.

Method of Assessment will be progressivehased:onassignrnent marks and term tests. Students are required to pass bot4 in ass~gn:r:nents and in te:ttn te st's~' :1.;" .,' ':' , , • ,., '. . : '.' ,,' ,: . ;,' .,

ENGLISH III 2 hours per week

Part (i) : Australian Literature 1 hour per week

;.,

This course will cover the development of literature in the colonial period, with detailed study of selected writers of the modern period.

ASSignments and Essays - Two essays, approx. 2000 words, due 4th June and 24th July.

Reference Books: Miller and l\1a.ca.rtney : Australian Literature. Dutton (Ed.) : Literature of Australia. Southerly: Meanjin. Australian Letters. Australian Literary Studies.

Method of As sessment - Assignments, class work, annual examination.

Part (ii) : English Method 1 hour per week

This introductory survey selects from the content for English Method Diploma in IviUSic Education. It aims to offer theoretical and practical foundations for practice teaching in English at the secondary level at the end of the year.

Practical work - demonstrations.

ASSignments and Essays - One essay of approxina. tely 1500 words due in July. Class exercises.

Refe rence Books: As for English IV (English Iviethod) (p. 110).

Method of Assessment- Essay, exercises and final written examination.

Page 111: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

__ • ··108') J ---'

MUSIC ill : Music in the Secondary School (A) 3 hours per week + choir

. .- .. , ',: L ':."! .;",{ .,' ',- " .. : ... ;.;',' ,"" . • ,~' . Method and Content: Class- sttidy·of--m.aterial-for program:min:g~

performance, reading and writing and aural work in Form I and Forms II-IV {non elective)...': . "" . . .;.,,~i(-; ' ..

Choir.

Instrumental: Recorder and tuned percusSion.

Score - reading. . " ,

Extra-curricular activities.

Assignments and Essays - Collection of listening materia;}, approx. three hour,s':preparation, dUe'3rdJuly~ Registe~ preparation, approx.three hours' preparation, due 2nd October.

Text Books: Eele : Listening Together.

Reference Books: 'Gollege.,_>Library 78·0-789.

, . , \.'

. ;Meth\jd"gl As sessm~rii: written and practical tests.

.: .! .. - ' '.. " .' .' ;.::: ')!' ~ -" ". :

progressive assessment tl:rougll regulaJ;. i., ,,"

.1, T;·~~.i.,.J. ~".' ;'1 ".:.1 .

.. 5:';): ',.:., .. ' .. - '"' , .. _- ..... -...... -- .-.,

.. r; j

.. ,; ..

'j t, i . ~)

,'nJJT, ': ~.,

::, "

",.' .

Page 112: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

PART IV

EDUCA TION IV 7 hours per week

109

YEAR IV

Part (i) : Educational Psychology 3 hours per week

Refer to Diploma in Art Education - Education IV (p. 98).

Assignments and Essays - Four 1500 word essays and one seminar to be presented by each student. Essay dates - 18th April, 27th June. 8th August. 3rd October.

Reference Books: Lists of references will be issued during the year.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (ii) : Philosophy of Education 2 hours per week

The aim of the course is to consider some of the issues of educational philosophy through the views of outstanding thinkers in this field over the ages.

The respective contributions to educational theory of the following will be considered in order:

The Sophists, Socrates, Plato, Aristotle, Aquinas, Erasmus, Locke, Rousseau, Pestalozzi, Herbart, Froebel, Dewey. Nunn, Livingstone, Ylhitehead.

Assignments and Essays - Each student will be required to present a seminar paper on a selected topic and objec,tive tests will be set at various stages as announced. See also entry below on method of assessment.

Text Books: Brubacher. J.S. : Modern Philosophies of Education. N. Y.: McGraw­

Hill, 1962. Curtis, S. J. : An Introduction to the Philosophy of Education. London:

University Tutorial Press, 1965. Curtis, S. J. and Boultwood, M.E.A. : A Short History of Educational

Ideas. London: University Tutorial Press, 1953.

Reference Books: As issued to students in duplicated form.

Method of Assessment - At the conclusion of the course, assessment will be by written examination. Those whose performance during the year has been considered satisfactory (as measured by seminar contributions and the objective tests) may substitute for the final examination an aSSignment of approximately 3000 words involving individual research on an approved topic.

---- -----.--~----------------.-... ~.---.

Page 113: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

110

Part (iii) : Principles of Education 2 hours per week

The recognition of the role of the teacher will lead to an examination of ways to meet these expectations. Classroom practices will be evaluated in terms of their educational and psychological bases.,,:

Assignments and Essays - A seminar will be presented by each student. Two long essay.s (2000 words) at beginning of Terms II and III.

,Reference Books:, As appropriate, these will be indicated.

Method of Assessment - Progressive - seminars and essays.

ENGLISH IV 6 hours per week

Part (i) : Literature of Today 2 hours per week

1. The Modern Short Story: examples from English and Australian literature; the techniqueo£ the modern short story .

. 2. The modern novel: selected examples from EngHsh and Australian writers,

3. Modern Australian Poetry: an examination of the work of contemporary writers, with reference to traditional forms and techniques. .

4. Selected examples of modern dramatic writing, including contemporary A ustralian write r s.

Assignments and Essays - Students will be expected to nominate a suitable seminar topic within the above range of topics, and present it to the group. Included in the yeart s work will be a major essay on a writer or a significant work of literature not otherwise dealt with in the course. Topics are to be submitted for approval by 18th April. Due date - third term. Minor essays on a specific short story and a specific poem will be set for first and second terms.

Text Books: As advised in lectures. Reading for fourth year should be initiated

in the long vacation preceding the course.

Reference Books: Basic references will be as notified in lectures. Supplementary lists

of refe~ences, texts and journals consulted will be the subject of ancillary bibliography activities during the course •.

Method of Assessment - Essays, seminar work, annual examination. , ,

Part (ii) : English Method 3 hours per week

1. Reorganization of Secondary Education: some implications for the teacher of English. ; " ' .

2. The aims of teaching English in Secondary Schools .. • i.

3. Some relationships betwe~n English and other subjects •.

4. The continuing ,growth .of the EngliSh teacher.

5. OVerview of con'tent of the English Syllabus for different fo rmsand levels. Elements of curriculum construction. .. .. "

6,. Appro~c;hes to ,the various a.spects .of ~nglish - aims, content,. lesson construction, evaluation, etc.

(a) Oral expression.

Ii

Page 114: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

(b) Reading skills. (c) Vlritten expression.

'. (d) Language growth. (e) Literature. (f) Mas s media.

111

(g) The library~ (h) futegrating English studies.

7. Teaching aids for English. Activities related to the teachingof English . . Play days, School Magazine, School Newspaper, Debating Contests, Testing.

8. Administration - responsibilities of the beginning teacher.

Practical work - ,demonstrations.

Assignments and Essays - Five major exercises spread over the academic. year.

Reference Books: Boutwell: Using W.l.aSS Media in the Schools. Brooks and Warren: Understanding Poetry. Dyce : Speech and Drania •

. ,Fowler:' Teaching Language, Composition and Literature. Grace: Response to Literature. Holbrook: English in the Secondary Schools. Little : Approach to Literature.. . Postmari: T'el~vision and the Teaching of English .• Schoenheimer : Education Through Eng1ish~

. Whitehead: ':['he Disappearing Dais. Periodicals ~nd Reports on .the Teaching of English •

. , Syllabuses i 'School Texts and Reference Books.

Method of .Assessment ... Essays, seminar work, analysis 6f demon­strations and final written 'e!~miD.ation'. . .; . .. .

Part (iii) : Speech Education I hour per week

1. Aims . . (i) To study the aims and methods of tea~hing speech: in the Primary

Schools. (il) To ensure that students possess a knowledge of basic principles

and techniques r~quired for speech improv~ment. (iii) To enco~r.age and assist' them to i~pl'ove their own speech.

2. Introductory (i) The place of speech in the school and in the community; some

attitudes towards it. The effects of modern inventions upon speech. (ii) What constitutes good speech and how it can be acquired.

(iii) Speaking as a form of expression and an art - requirements of skUI,and taste. Effective communication of thought and ~eeling.

3. The phonetic Alphabet (a) Limitations of the 'Englis,h Alphabet. (b) The Phonetic Alphabet required for the sounds of Australian Speech. (c) WordS;

(i) formation, syllabification, accentuation; (ii) forms of Stress or Breath Force;

(iii) Pointing; emphasis of words. (iv) "weak" and "strong" forms of pronunciation.'

.4. Style oinPublic Speaking.

Page 115: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

112

5. Delivery, Comprehension, Feeling, Imagination. (i) Phrasing (meaning, punctuation, breathing), pausation (vocal

punc tua tion) . (ii) Speech Variables: Rhythm and emphasis, pause, pace, volume,

pitch, intonation, modulation and inflections. (iii) Comprehension and appreciation of material for thought content,

sound values, emotions, moods, atmosphere, tone. (iv) Preparation and Practice: Occasion, audience, rate of thought and

assimilation of ideas, self-confidence. (v) Forms of Emphasis - of ideas; convictions, sentiment; kinds of

and effects of gesture, movement.

6. Voice Production (i) The Organs of Speech - names and diagrams.

(ii) Posture, relaxation, and purposeful bodily movement. (iii) Breathing and Breath Control. (iv) Tone - Resonance and resonators; "forward" placing of the voice. (v) Faults of Pitch and Resonation - ear training - a fundamental

essential in all speech work and in teaching speech.

7. Articulation. Definition. Clas sification of Consonants. Difficulties in pronouncing Consonants and faults in articulation.

8. Enunciation. Definition (a) Classification of Vowels: Cardinal Vowel Diagram. Fundamental

lip position. (b) Diphthongs and triphthongs. (c) Board, General and Cultivated Forms of Australian pronunciation.

Phonetic illustration. (Simple phonetic transc r iptions are required.)

9. Pronunciation EliSion, substitution, aSSimilation, intrusion. Spelling pronunciations. Variants in pronunciation use (see Curriculum). Forms ci. plosion. Devoicing and voicing of sounds. Words commonly mispronounced.

10. Methods of Teaching (i) The basic principles underlying speech education in the schools; . habit formation; the mechanical aspects of speech; expressive

aspects; materials. (ii) Time to be allotted at various levels. Correlation with other

subjects. (iii) Routines in classroom procedure. ProgreSSion. (iv) Materials f or speech education and their uses at various levels;

jingles, rhymes, speech games, conversation, etc., verse, dramatic material, prose.

(v) The Formal Speech Lesson, Remedial Speech, Ear Training, Speech Situations, e. g. , answering telephone, etc.

Note: "Applied" Speech through drama, verse speaking, picture talks, debates, story telling, expressive reading, discuSSions, lecturettes, addresses, speeches for formal occasions, committee meetings, conferences, reports, news sessions, etc., will be covered, as far as pOSSible, in English Method Lectures. Puppetry and Miming will be likewise dealt with.

(vi) Use of Eroadcasts, Television, Tape Recorder, Gramophone, Projectors, Microphone, Public Address System.

11. Demonstration Lessons in as many topics from section 10 as possible, followed by discussion.

12. The Treatment of Speech Faults and Defects in Children. The Speech Clinic and Speech Therapist. Dental Clinic and Orthodontal Treatment.

Page 116: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

113

Note: For mor~·de'ta.il reference for' this course see Calendars printed before 1966.

14. Practical Work (i) A few minutes of some lectures will be devoted to practical speech

work for all students, e. g., readings of verse, prose, etc., in unison, in groups and individually; ill exercises, in demonstrations and in giving' talks 'and speech-making.' All members .~re urged to practise all forms of oral work consistently. In some cases illdividual tuition may be recommended.

(ii) Tape-recordings of voices'and"assessme'nt 'of'speech habits. (iii) Recordings of Drama, Prose, and Verse as models of acceptable

expressive English will be played. 'Suitable films will be shown.

15. Examinations will consist of three parts': ! .. (a) APracticaLTest ... Reading of prepared prose _ drama,' ot- verse

. ·sel-e:ci:tion4 .. or.\sight;readingsof sitnilarmaterial.' Talks' .' . prepared or impromptu. Lists of words commonly mispronounced

and/or speech exercises. Communication between the reader, speaker and audience must be effective.

(b) A Written Test. (c) Small aSSignments may be set from time to time. Note: (i) A check will be kept upon second year students who have had

speech defects or bad speech faults during their first year and a further practical speech test may be given in third term of their second year.

(ii) A satisfactory stam:lard of spoken English is essential to obtain recommendation for a Teacher's Certificate.

Practical work - Demonstrations; visit to clinics; excursions.

ASSignments and Essays - Short phonetic transcription aSSignments -two a term.

Text Books: Bullard and Lindsay: Speech at Work. , cAllister: Primary Teachers' Guide to Speech Training. McAllister: A Year's Course in Speech Training. Dyce, J. R. : Speech and Drama in the Secondary School. The Curriculum.

Method of Assessment - Written examination and practical tests.

HEALTH EDUCATION IV : Health Education 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce (p.41).

MUSIC IV : Music in the Secondary School (B) 4 hours per week + choir

Method and Content: Programming of material for elective class; harmony and melody - writing; score-ready; preparation of set works; orchestration for school orchestra.

Choir.

Instrumental: Recorder tuition and tuned percussion.

Stage production of musical works.

ASSignments and Essays - Preparation of two set works, approx. three hours' work each, due 8th April and 14th May. Register preparation

Page 117: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

114

approx. 2. hours, due 13th August. Essay, 1500 words, due 11th November.

Text Books: Eeb : Listening Together.

,~: .. Reference Books; . CollegELLibrary 780-789.

'.' 'Method Of Assessment - Progressive eva~ua.tiori; thro~tgli.r~gular written and practical te sts.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION IV : Principles and Practice of Physicai Education 2. hours per week

Refer to Diploma in Art Education (p.99).

Assignments and Essays ~ Coaching Guide in one major sport to be· handed in in three sec.tions on following dates - second week." in May (section 1), second week in August (section 2.), third week in October (section 3).

\ .

; ;

... ~ . . •• :: ::: J .' ".' i.:) :.1

i .. { ;

. ,', .' ::"'. : .

. ; .:,' ~. ;. .' \. ,":"[

I • "-r

Page 118: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

DIP~Qtq~ ". IN: MU,SIC-' __ EPUCATION.- TWO~YEAR:_:C:ONVERSION

(PROFESSIONAL) COURSE "j,

.. '.TJ. ",i ,;Students with a Connn-.toriun:l-Diploma or other Music qualifications ~t ieast equivalent to those, of the four~year trained full-time Diploma in MU,sic Education CourlJ.;~, s~dents may convert to the Diploma in :t"Iusic Education by undertaking successfully the following two-year course of full­ti~e study at ,the Teachers l College

"

YEAR I YEAR II SUBJECT .....

hrs/wk hrs/wk "

Music '.7, -.. 6 Second Teaching Subject 3 " f -:.,.:3 .. , Education 5 5 Language, Speech, and Drama Z ~.: i ' *~ . .':.".'.i iZ-Cnltural Study , Z·,'n; -

, .. ' 2 . ,

P.E. and Health Education 1-_ ".;:':' :"Z Demonstrations Z ",li' Z

, . . , "

I Totals . .

ZZ ) .

ZZ .. _." ... - . " . ~ .... -. .'- .......... ....... -

Page 119: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

116

ALLOCATIONS OF ·L~CTURE;. HO.VI.t§ : TO SUBJECTS

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE (2-YEAR STATPS)- INDUSTRIAL ARTS -ARTISAN

A one-year course of profes'siOh~~p:tepa;ration for experiencEd journey­men who have obtained academic qualificationS for admission to the Teachers' College • All subjects are listed as Year II status a8 the course counts as a second yea-r course being constructed on the principle that entrants already have a trades certificate and experience as an appreritice and journeyman.

SUBJECTS hrs/wk

Education ~ _. . ... . - ... _ .... ." 4 English 3

I Health Education 1 Industrial Arts:

(a) Crafts 3 (b) Drawing and Design 3

, ..

(c) Mechanics & Materials Science .:l' 3" ;

(d) Metalwork " 4: .. .. ... :.'

(e) Woodwork 4 .... ~hys ic~~ ~4:u<:~J~on_ ... -.. ..... . " ... - .... .....•.... .. J

D.emonstrations/Observations ;.: 2 ..

..... _ ... _ . . - .. - . " •.. .. , ........ • .••• 0'. ,'_ • __ .~ "

Total 28

Notes: There are no option subjects.

Supplementary and qualifying subjects, tutorials and practice teaching are as set out under the heading of the Primary Course except that students are exempted from first year requirements and home practice at the beginning of second year.

Page 120: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

-- -. 117.' ----DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED FOR TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE

- 2- YEAR STATUS - INDUSTRIAL ARTS ARTISAN

EDUCA TION II : Theory and Practice of Education 4 hOrirs per week

The course is divided into th.efollowing broad areas: (a) The structure a nd organisation of the educational system in N. S. w. (b) The proce ss of learning; in.telligence;. motivation; personality. (c) The contribution of the Social Sciences to general teaching method. (d) The adolescent in the Australian culture.

'. Assignments and Essays - Assignments of approx. 600 words each are required every two weeks.

Text Books: Connell, W. : Foundations of Education. iViunn. N. : Psychology.

Ivethod of Assessment - Contin'tious evaluation throughout the year. by assignment work and class testing.

ENGLISH II : Cultural Studies in Literature 3 hours per week.

Refer to Teacher's Certificate -' 2-year - Geogr~i>hy/Commerce (p.41).

ASSignments and Essays - Four essays 1000-1200 words, due 17th April. 4th June, 7th Augu~t, 10th September. .: ,'- .

Iviethod of Assessment ',;, ASSighznents a.ndw:dtt~~~;C~mination • . ] .. ' ;. ,

HEALTH EDUCATION"'U 1 hour per week

Refer to Teacher's C~i"tificate - i-yea~ ~ .. P~imary Teaching (p.20).

... . ;' ~ . '; : '. .-;, \ !.!.,': '"-

INDUSTRIAL ARTS IIA 17 hours per week

Part (i,);: C.~ili.tIl.A, :~ >,General Crafts and Method 3 hours per week

(a) General Crafts. Design: Appreciation of the principles of design. Applicationof

these basic principles to subsequ~ht forms of craftwork. Paper lvlodelling: Two dLnensional, pictorial and geometrical cut

paper designs. Three dimensional, paper alld light cardboard sculpture. Sculpture based on geometrlcal shapes. Construction and

balance of mobile s. Paper Ornamentation: 1viarbling, coloured paste. splash pain~ing,

oil painting. spatter work, stencilling and stick printing. ., Graphic Arts: Brief outline of commercial printing industry.

Use of primary colours ~n;prod~~tion of multi-coloured prints. Linoleum Block Printing~ Preparation of linoleum blocks for'

printing on paper and fabric in one or more colours. Straw board Modelling: The use of straw board. of different ~eights.

bookbinder's cloth and vari()ustYPErs of c6\r~·ipa:pers to make"articles such as chess boards, morie'y boxe's, portfoi~6s.etc.·- '. ",' '. .

Bookbinding: Case binding of'single leavE;_~~ 'bindiIlg~ingles'ectio~~_;'\; 1 .

andmultisection binding.' . , Ceramics: The nature, preparation and storage of clay. Tools.

equipment. and materials used for decorating and glazing pottery. Types of kilns and sequeJ:lc.e of firing operations. Hand modelled and

Page 121: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

118 .

slab built work. ':Nlould making and slip casting. Throwing and turnin~t ona potters wheel.

Leatherwork: The manufacture, storage and types of leather suitable for hand made articles, together with the tools and ac:cessories used. Decorative 'ti·eatmEmt~f leather by tooling, embossing, thonging and

'.' 'stitching.' Fixing' eyelets, catc'hes and other forms of hardware. , ,. Cleariin;g. staining, and polishing.

Basketry:' Growth and processing of cane used for basket making.

(b)

Types and sizes of cane. Use of bases. Technical terms and methods ,of weaving •. Top'and base borders. Practical work - waste paper basket, picnic basket.

Weaving: A brief outline of the development of weaving. Details of terms and accessories used. Design of suitable patterns, selection of wool colours. Practical work~ Weaving a sc::arf on a frame loom.

Puppetry - Papier Iv~ache: Making and clothing glove puppets. Use ,of papier mache to construct ,masks,' relief geographical models, land forms, etc.

Method. The purpose of this cours~is to 'coordinate the te-achingmethod-ifOf;--:­

the various subjects taught in the field of Industrial Arts. Student teacherswiH be r,equired too(jserve demonstration lessons,

and prepare lesson notes, make charts and teaching aids, cut stencils' and operate duplicators and projectors ..

Loose leal books of referetlce in Woodwo'rk, Metalwo.rk,. Techni<;al . • ',' " .' .'" ", ~ \ ! , " ",' , .J.. ~

Drawing, Industrial Arts arid Crafts will also be compiled covering the wo rk- in. the various syllabuse s .' Safe working' procedures will be emphasised.

Exercises in perspective drawing and architectural rendering will.' be included in the course.

Practical wor.k will be:carried out iri lectures.

ASSignments and Essays - Practical work commenced in lectures will be completed as assignments.

Text Books: .. . . I' 1.:::;'1 , ... ,. " '

Department of Educ·ation : Craft and-lndustrialArts Syllabuses. Department of Education: Craft Leaflets. Collins, A. F. : Bookcrafts for Senior Pupils. Crampton, G.. : Canework.. ' Wilcox, Vlf. E. : Perspective Drawing for Beginhers.

Ii

·'Reference Books: College Library at 371, 607-700, 72Q-749.

" "- . " '" ', ..

Method of Assessment -ASSignments and progreSSive evaluation •

. Part (H),: Dr,awing and DeSign IIA 3 hours per week

. Thisc~urse is 'd~sigi;led to establi.sh baSic, concepts inEngine~ring DraWi~'g, Descriptive GeomE?fry, i\rchj.tectural D:I;a)Ving;a.nd,:pktorial Drawing: ProviSion isals9 ;~~4~ fo'r the i~ciu'si,op;;f s~~h~,~~;"ingsas u,sed in cabinet work. ' .

. , . Emphasis on a high 'quality of draughtsmanship -w.ill' be maintained at all times and methods of efficiently imparting' these skills 'to otherswill'be studied. The syllabus as taught in the schools has beet1'an~ilySed into "basic units of work". Students are to be shown how these' can be uSed as lesson notes •.. '

I>::,.'

. 'The "Australian Standard: Dra~ing Office Practice,i and·the :,;' ... "Architectural and 'Building Practic~1I to be introduced and the importance

Page 122: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

119

of standardization in drawing procedures to be stressed.

Both first and third ~ngle projectipns will be \ls~d but only the first angle method to be used in Descriptive Geometry.

::r'he r.elationship between orthographic. isomet~,c, oblique"axonometric and perspective drawings will be studied.

Some examples in freehand sketching of machine parts and architectural details, both as~embled and "~xpl()ded" to .be given.,

The solution of problems relating 'to the practical application of plane and solid geometry will also be given.

Basic teaching methods are to be combined with the Various topics listed as each topic is presented and demonstration: lessoris showing how topics are taught in the schools will be presented 'and the various teaching procedures used will be discussed after each demonstration.

Students will be encouraged to use' pict~rial representations and construct teaching aids to illustrate abstract problems. Asfar as possible concrete examples will be given of the a'pplitation of prinCiple's.

Certain exercises will be set in each lecture, but so as to give a full coverage of the course short aSSignments have been s~t t!-l,be,ha.nded in at weekly intervals. Selected topics from Craft II Drawing and Desi.gn will be included during lectures in thi rd term •

. Practical w'orkwill be carried out in each lecture .. " :-, J .,. " <. -.

Assignments and Essays -'Completion of practical 'work commenced in lectur·es·'. ,.; .,.;(.

""". Text Books:, . ,)

. Fitness :bes~~i.ptive Geometry andDraw~ng, BookS I, 2, 3. ,', Steel ~~d'Fitlless:: Descriptive Geometry and Drawi~g, Senior Book.

Refe rence ' Books: ' Luzadder : Engineering Drawing. Glenist~r : Engineering Dl"a.wing. 'tiiesecke e,t al : Technical Drawing •.

. Feirer: Drawing and Plat;lning for Industrial A'rta.

Method of Assessment - Examinati()n and p;r.og.re.ssive e.val~tion.

Part (iii) : Mechanics and Materials Science lIA 3 hours pe r week

This course will include the' d~V:~I<:>pment of tools. machin,es~nd materials by man through the ages and the effect of such developments on man's environment.

From the historical strand will follow a course involving the students in experimental work carried out 'in the testing laboratory wlie're they can explore the properties of many materials by carrying out shear tests, tensile tests, and compression tests. Materials will abi!o'be eXiimiti'ed ulide'r the microscope to study their microstructures .

. A studyofrriat'erials bothnaturaland,tnanufacturedwiil be carried out with'a' ,reasonable depth of tre~t:tnent.Structurearidproperties of these materials will 'l)e'-examin.edandwher'e applicable equilibrium diagrams will be':studied. ,. i !

in 'co~ju~ction with th~ M~:teri'~lsScience coul'sestudents willdea.! , .:'; .' " .

with static coplanar force systems and simple dynamics .

. "Toward,s 'theiatt,er part 9£ the cour~e Ute studentwillde:sign a small. " structural'model, make 'all necessary cal.~ulati(>ns, an.d. choQl:le s.uitable. material

Page 123: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

120

for its construction.

Laboratory work will be carried out in each lecture.

Assignments and Essays - Completion of practical eXPeriments <t:hrtimenced in lectures. As Signmenton Hi'story of Technolo gy, 2000 words,.

third week of each term.

: .~ Text Books: Jenson and Chenoweth: Applied Engineering Mechanics. Higgis :. Metallurgy for .Engineers. Derry and Williams: Short History of Tech:Qology.

Reference Books: RoUason : Metallurgyfur Engineers. Van Vlack : Elements of Material Science. Van Vlack : Ceramics. Manford : Technics and Civilisation. College Library at 620.

IvJ.ethod of Assessment - Yearly examination and progressive evaluation.

Part· (iv) : Metalwork llA 4 hours per week' , .

Student teachers in this course were previously engaged in industry as artisans in various trades. ' As such they acquired extensive imo~ledge and,sldlls in perforO\i;ng th.e requirements of theirparticularcraft.,;:.cacnd so this course has been arranged to assist them in converting the role of the artisan to that ci the classroom teacher. A wide variety of classroom situations will be arranged frequently to provide opportunities for the student teachers· to b~cb~e accustomed to them. InstruCtion in room. organ­ization, recording, marking; maintenance and' requisitioning will be given. Safety precautions and correct machine and hand-tool operations at the pupil level will be demonstrated.

A selection of mdels that could be used as a basis in a bala~ced programme for Forms I, . II, III; and IV and the Fass ,Cd:~:dit and Ad~ap.ced level will be con s tructedbye'ach'stud ~rit teacher. .

" .

Practical work:will be carried but iueach. lecture ..

Text Books: Cook, W. : Craft fOr Schools. Cook, W. : Metalwork for Schools •

. Moroney , A. J. : Metalwork.

Reference Books: College Library 660, 671, 680. 687 •

. . Method of Assessment;- Progressive ·evaluation. . .

. Part (v) : W.oodwork riA 4 hours per week

. This is ,a course speciaUyp.esigned for·artisanswho wish to become teachel'sof ~np.~s;tr.iaI4rt.s and Crafts. They will he requiredto.C'ompletea cours~ Q{pl"actical Wo()dwork. Models included. in the course .will be typical' of the jobs attempted by school pupils at various levels of a complete s'econdary programme. Theory of Woodwork will, of necessity. be confined to thct.t which is direetl'yrela'tedto' the practical work in hand .

. " " ~

The student will be expected to familiarise himself with the general or ganisati6n ·bithe practical'room and be capable' of carrying out the normal maintenance of all tools and appliances. .

Page 124: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

121

Throughout the year the student will be in contact with practising teachers. He wiUserve his own interests well if he avails himself of every opportunity to look, to listen, to inquire and to record. . ".,'. .'

Practicai work will be carried out in each lecture.

Text Books: YTalton, J.A. : 'Woodwork in Theory and Practice. Glenister. S.A. : Contemporary Design in Woodwork.

Reference Books: Gray., T .A. and McCormick. T. : School Certificate 'iNoodwork~ Lloyd, C:;.G. : TlleAustralian Carpenter ~ Department of Technical Education N. S. W'. : Carpentry and Joinery. Department of Labour and National Service: French Polishing. Haywood. C. H. : Practical Veneering. College Library at 684, 621-629.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II : Secondary School Games I hour per week

Basic c,o,aching in major games -C;l'icket~ Rugby,Soc;:(:eJ;'.,Hoc~ey,;\ Basketball, . ,Voile''y . Ba ~l. '.' .

Swimming and Life Saving.

Athletics~ •

The game's Ie sson~

oigan~e.a.,tion6f carnivals.

Th.esportsmaster.

Practical work - Practical appli~ation 'of major and minor games.­athletics and swimming •

. Text Books: '. Department of Physical Education : Handbook for SWimming

Instructors.

Method of Assessment - Unit work tests.

Page 125: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

122

ALLOCATIONS 'OF LECTURE HOURS -'TO SUBJECTS

TEACHER'S CERTIFICATE '(2-YEARSI3- YEARS/4-YEARS)' PRIMARY

TEACHING/INFANT TEACHING/SECONDARY TEACHING

No set table can be supplied for 1969, since such considerable variati()uoiacademic and professional. needs and requirements exists within this grouping of students. Se~ One Year Professional Courses (p.133) for a, ~et_ailedexplaJlation'_of proposed future subject and time allocations for such stlJ:dents.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS PRESCRIBED IN 1969 for

(i) Non-graduate Returned University students who are ca~dida.tes for Teacher's Certificate 2-year/3-year Primary Teaching I Irifant Teaching / Secondary Teaching.

(ii) Graduate students not electing Diploma in Education courses who are candidates for Teacher's Certificate 4-year Infant ':reaching.

(iii) To meet the special needs and circumstances of certain other students whose combination of subjects does not permit their inclusion within previously scheduled courses. In general these students are candidates for Teacher's Certi£icate2-year/3~year Primary Teaching / Infant Teaching I 'Secbnclary Teaching.' -' ,

Where in (i), (ii), (iii), above there is provision made for bridge, equivalent or condensed courses to meet special :requirements, studetits are reminded that examinatjon, and/or assessment may be carried out at different levels.

There are no option courses. Supplementary and qualifying subjects, tutorials and practice teaching are as set out under the heading of Primary Teaching (pp. 1- 2).

Page 126: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

...

123

EDUCA TION II & III 7 hours pe r week

Part (i) ,: Comre,rat,ive Education 2 hou'rs per week

The aim of the course is to consider the provision of educational facilities in 'certain 'countries , coveTing, in particular, the or ganisational and administrative structures, types of schools, methods of finance and control, and make comparisons with existing practices in New South Wales where applicable .

. Th~ educational systems of the following countries will be studied in order:

The United Kingdom. the United States of America, France, the Union of the Sovet Socialist Republics, the People's Republic of China, Sweden, Brazil, Canada, the Philippines, Japan, South Africa, New Zealand.

Assignments and Essays. Each student will be required to prepare and pres.ent'a seminar paper on a selected topic, and objective tests will be set at various stages as announced. See also entry below on method of assessment.

;",' ' ..

Text Books:" . Cramer, J.F. and Browne, G. S. : Contemporary Education. N. Y.:

Harcourt Brace, 1965. Reller,. T. L. and. Morphet, E. L. : Comparative Educational Admini­

stration. Englewood Cliffs, N. J. : Prentice-Hall, 1962.

Refere?CE;:~.ooks: i' .

As issued to students in duplicated form.

Method ~iAssessment • At the conclusion of the course, aSSessment will be by written examination. Those whose performance during the year has been considered satisfactory (as measured by seminar contributions and the objective tests) may substitute for the final examination aQ assignment of approximately 3000 words involving individual research on an approved topic.

(p.40).

Part (ii) : Educational Psychology (a) 3 hours per week

Refer to D'iploma in Art Education (p. 98).

Part (iii) : Modern Educational Practice 2 hours per week

Refer to Teacher's Certificate - 2-year - Geography/Commerce

ENGLISH II & III 1/6/7 hours per week

Part (i) : Oral Expression 1 hour per week

(Pre scribed iQ 1969 for all students included in cate gories (i), (ii). (iii) on page l22J '

Refer to Teacher's Certificate .' Z-year - Geography/Commerce (pp.36-37).

Page 127: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

." .. -- 124

Part (ii) : Drama - Practical 1 hour per week

(Prescribed in 1969 for Engli$h MethodstUderits only.)

1. Expression and communication through drama.

2~'Stagecraft:basic acting, produc,tion, design and stage-management , skills'. :'

.3 •. D;rama in the Secondary School.

Practical work - Exercises in the above. Preparation and presentation oLa one· ... act play.

Reference Books: Way: Development Through Drama. Fiala: Drama in Action. Dy'ce : Speech and Drama in the Secondary School. College Library 792.09, 822.

Method of Assessment - Progressive assessment of theoretical and practi<:al work. ,-:0

1' .

Part (iii) : Background and Perspective in Literature 3 hours per week

.. ' .' ; t . I • • , ~. """ \ .' '. ,~. " , < '

. "(Prescribed in 1969 for EngliSh Method students only.) " . ,',

, "

_ .l~. Tb,estudyofliterary fonns - novel,poein, play, 'short story .

. z. 'Study of prescribed books, including recommended objectives for School Certificate and Higher School Certificate. In addition, selected modern novels, plays, poems, short stories are covered.

Assignments and Essays - Brief class exercises spread over year. Essay, 1500 words, due third term.

Text Books: As prescribed for School Certificate and Higher School Certificate

Exammations. "

Reference Books: As recommended in lectures.

Method of Assessment - Final written examination.

Part (iv) : The Teaching of English 3 hours per week

(Prescribed in 1969 for English Method students only.)

1. Basic principles underlying the teaching of English subjects.

2. Review of content of various secondary curricula.

3. The teaching of language in the secondary school.

4. Oral expression.

5. Written expression.

6. (a) The teaching of reading'in the secondary sc!hool - ~echanica1. (b) Remedial reading. (c) Extended reading programmes.

7. Literature. The techniques and problems of teaching (a) poetry, (b) prose, (c) drama, in each of the secondary lorrr-.

Page 128: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

..

·---., 125,

,8. Dramatic Art. (a) ResponsibUity of the English department in school drama.

, (b) practical aspects biproduction in the school.

9. The English Programme and Regfster.

, '10.' The' English teacher and the school library. The teacher-librarian.

11. The organisation of the English department in a secondary school.

Practical work '" Demonstrations. Practice Teaching. Compilation of te,a:~ingIlJAterial.

ASSignments and Essays - ,Five short exercises spread over year. Analysis and discussion of demonstration lessons.

Text Books: As recommended in lectures.

Reference Books: As recommended in lectures.

Method of Assessment - Progressive evaluation of practical work, discussion, aSSignments. Final written examination.

HEALTHEDtJCATION Ii &tIll 1 hour per week

. . ~' . ". ,:' .r'"" :' : < j ,

Refer to Teacher's Certificate.- 2~year ... Primary Teaching (p.20).

PHYSICAL EDUCATION II & III 2 hours per week

, , pa:tt (il: Fhysit'al Education in :the Primary School 2 h6ursper w'eek'

Refer to Teacher's Certificate ~ 2-ye,ar - Primary Teaching (p.2l).

Part (ii) : Secondary School Games {An alternative to Pa~t (i». 2hQurs pe:r:,week

'A study of the gen~ral principles and practice of Physical Education, team ,games, and sports together with r,egular practical experience related to the teaching of PhYSical Education and supervision of sport in schools.

Practical work - Practical application of all major games including dancing.

ASSignments and Essays - 1 Coaching Guide on any major sport -three sections - to be handed in second wee.k of May (Section 1), second week in August (section 2), and third week in October (aection 3).

Method of Assessment - Unit work tests.

TEACHING METHODS

A. LANGUAGES

,(a) FRENCH !vLETHOD

"," : 3 hours per week

i . "; ,\ :.... ~ '.. ',' I .'

,This ,course involves a study of the, aims and methodso£'teaching French in secondary schools. The contents of the ErenchSyllabus will be' studied in lectures, seminars and demonstrations. There are two periods of practice teaching. Studen~s will be requi;red to prepare bac~ground material in accordaIice'wi'th' the'Frenc'h Syllabus.'" ",' " ,

;: .

Page 129: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

126

Throughout the year students will be given an opportunity to practise their oral French so that they :may gain greater.facility in its use for the classroom situation. The examination will include an oral: test in which an adequate facility in the language must be shown.

Students will be asse,ssed o~ their aSSignments and seminar prepara­tion during the year as well'as on the results of the final examination, which is of three hours' duration.

AssignmentsandEssays.-Each student is required to conduct at least one seminar and to prepare lesson material for oral presentation.

Method of Assessment - Annualexa:mination of three hours' duration.

(b) LATIN 1vLETHOD 3 hours per week

The course is designed for those who have followed University courses in Latin, for one, two. or three years, and wish t6 teach it in the Secondary School. It includes lectures, demonstration lessons in schools, student seminars, and teaching practice.,

The fol1owingtopiC~ receive att~titlon:" Ca) The aims of teaching Latin and its place in the modern

curriculum. (b) Methods and techniques of teaching foreign langtiages, in relation

tom.odern: educational and lin.guistic theory. (c) Programme construction. (d) Lesson types. (e) Background material: antiquities etc. Cf) Pronunciation of Latin: opportunity will be given for students to

practise an acceptablE~ p~on\lnciation, ·with attention to quantity, rhythm and intonation. An oral test forms part of the examination.

The written examination is of three hours' duration. Copies of Syllabuses are supplied.

Assignments and Essays - Each student is required to conduct at le~st one seminar, and to prepare lesson material for oral presentation.

l\(~ethod of Assessment ~ Annual examination of three hours' duration.

B. MATHE1vlATICS

Ca) JUNIOR lV.LA THElvLA TICS METHOD 3 hours per week

1. Lesson outlines in mathematics ..

Z: Discussion of topics from the syllabuses. looking' at Ca) setting out, (b) methods of presentation, (c) background which may be used, (d) difficulties likely to be encountered, (e) grading of exercises.

3. Discussion of programmes, text bookS, te,sts and testing -aids, etc.

ASSignments and Essays - Essay, 5000 words, due 1 st October. Five assignments (500 words each) due 10th April, l7thApril,Z6th June, 6th August, l'st October.

T ext' Books: , ,

Syllabuses'in Mathe'matics and Notes Thereon •.

Reference Books: Any standard text book in Mathematics used in N. S. W. Schools.

Page 130: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

127

Method of Assessment - Final examination and assignments.

'. (b) ;SENIOR N.tA THE1tlA TICS METHOD 3 hours per week

,The organisation of mailiematicscc)ursesin the senior secondary, school.

. \ .... ,:. 'Lesson types', lesson structure, topic' development •

Curriculum study based upon the Level 2F syllabus.Sdme topics frornthe Lev;el 3 and Level'!' syllabuses will als'o be discussed.

Testing - construction of tests, marking, treatment of errors, recording of marks.

School, text books - their u~e ,and abuse.,

Approximately one houI-per weekwill b~ devoted to observing lessons given by demonstration teachers~ ViTheneverp6s'slble, these lessons will be arranged to illus·trateand clarify 'pointsii'i'sin'g:ititecture s.

;1, "

Programming.;:.: :,' .

The development of mathe'matics courses in New South Wales. The aims and advantages of the current syllabuses. '

An examination of some overseas courses in "the new mathematics".

Assignments and Essays - Five assignments, each approximately 500 words, due 2nd April, 14th Wmy, 25th June,6'thAugUst" 24th September.

Text Books: SyUabuses'(l,nd Not~s for,J;ormS V and VI.

Reference Books: Students will have to refer to school teJct books'for'thecurrent

syllabuses and pl"evious syllabuses, pupilsf workbooks and teachers' manuals for overseas mathematics projects ,exatnination'papers and examiners' comments, syllabuses for mathematics ,cpurses in,Ne:wSouth Wales since, 1 c; 45 • ' ,:' ;. i '.,' '':

Method of Assessment-' Flnal examinatiortVv'ith as'signments.

C. SCIENCE,., " '

Ca) JUNIOR SCIENCE METHOD 3 hours per-tVee'k" ; . ' ,

The purpose of this course is to give the student the opportuh.lty to under$ta.rid'~ to e:k!peraehce'and: to evaluate objectives, methods and evaluation procedures appropriate to science education at this level.

1. Objectives for ~cience teaching. :.TC)j:.j i"'j . '/ -;.':1.1::"·. •

:?" Jyiethpds for ,Cl:t,tai~i.ngit:qese objective~ .. ". ' -Syllabuses (local and elsewhere),

-Planning for science teaching. -Explanation, DiSCUSSion, Questioning,

• ;~. 1 , .. Demon stration 6f expe riments";- : - Labora to ry acti vi tie s , . ' -Out of door activitcis, , -Use of textbook's,' study guides, w6~ksheets, - Prb gramriled: learning, , - Use; ollibra-i'Y,' ; -Use of visual aids. , . , " ; . '.,:

----------------------------

Page 131: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

128

3. Evaluation.

4. The teaching of topics selected fr,om.~he l.ocal syllabuses to illustrate the above features of science teacliing.

subject. Practical work will be useq to illustrate appropriate aspects of the

Assignm~nts and Essays - Weekly assignments (approx. 500 words).

Text Books: No se~ texts. Students will be referred to a variety of books of the

type set out below.

Reference Books: Lacey, A. L. : Guide to Science Teaching in Secondary Schools. Thurber and Collette: Teaching Science in Todays Secondary Schools. Massey, N. B,. : Patterns for the Teaching of Science. Lee,. E. : New Developments in Science Teaching. Marshall,. J. : Current Trends in Science Edu~ation. U. N. E. S. C. O. : Sourcebook for Science Teachers. Mes sel et al : Science for High School Students. Bogen et .al : Advancing with Science. Whitehead: Science and the Modern World.

Method of A.s.sessment- Final examination.

(b) SENIOR SCIENCE 'IVlETHOD 3 hours per week

The purpose of this course is - to revise and extend the urtderstanding of science to be taught at

this level, - to stimulate interest in the t.eaching of senior science, - to give the student the opportunity to acquire soundly based

confidence in teaching senior scie·nce.

1. Objectives of Senior Science Teaching - Traditional objectives, - Objectives of new courses (Australian and Overseas).

2. Teaching Techniques - selection and adaptation of methods considered in Junior Science

Method, - consideration of methods particularly appropriate to Senior Science.

3. Evaluation Procedures. - Selection and design of those pro.cedures appropriate to Senior

. Science , - Evaluation of those in current use.

4. The teaching of topics selected from N. S. W. Senior Science Syllabus to illustrate the application of the above objectives, teaching technique's and evaluation procedures.

Refe rence Books: , . Messel, H. et al (Ed.) : Senior Science for High$chool Students.

Part I and II. Edmonds, A. et al : Chemistry for Forms V and VI..' Edmonds, A et al : Phy~ics for Forms ,V, and VI. McDonnell, Massey and Tebbutt : Enquiring into the .F;a·rth. Chemical Bond Approach: Investigating Chemical Syste·ms. '.' Chem. Study: Chemistry, An Experimental Science. Physical Science Study Committee: Physics.

Page 132: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

.129::. ---

... " < .'~ .... . Nedelsky, L. : Science Teaching and Testing. '.< ........ --_ •.

Joseph, et al : A Sourcebook for the Physical Sde~·ceS. Heller: Geology and Earth Science Handbook. University of N.S.W. : Appr.oaclitOCheinist.ry (l961-1?66).·· Nuffield Foundation: Books related to Chemistry arid Physics.

Method of Assessment - Final examination.

SCIENCE II, III, IV: Biology 4 hours per week

'. '

This subject is provided to enable scHm'ce stUdents in theirprof~ssional year to reach a mip.i,mum [email protected]:l:d in Biology,if Bi.ology has not been included in their University studies . . , ,

1. Introduction: Biology in relation to the other sciences. , , '.~ . ; .

2. The Cell: Structu're, Cellular Metabolism. Mitosis and Meiosis. I ; : ~ •

3. Plant Tissues ~

4. Plant Morphology, Leaf Structure and Photosynthesis. Modifications, of Leaf Structure.

5. Root Structure. Root Hairs, Anatomy of the Root.

6. Stein' St-!ructu:re~ :DicotylE~dori.s, Monocotyledons~ Stem'modifications.

7. Reproduction in the Flowering Plant.

8. The Mamp1al._ Dig-estive,. Ci.rculato·ry, Respiratory, Urinary,' Reprod~ctive ,and Ner~ous Systemfi. ·,.i..

9. Animal Tissues. :.' (; (): . ,

10. Heredity, mechanism, chemical basis, protein synthesis.

11,. History of Eyol1,lti9nary, TJ:.leories, Moder.n Theorie~ andEvolution~ Adapta~iop. asa. re~ult of Evolution.

12. Eco1:ogical prinCiples'. 'Local Ecological Studies.

13. Diverl1Jity~fI..ivingOrgan.is~s ... '. !'Jon VClr~cular. Plants) V~s,cularPlants" Pteridophyta" Spermatophyta, Gymnosperm:ae, Angio&permae. Fungi - selected examples. Coelenterates, Platyhelminthes, Ann~1ida, Arthropoda, Mollusca, Echinode rmata.

., '.; .

Practical work - two hours per week. '. Certain fie lei excursions .

, A s.si gnmen~s and, E s ~a ys - Each student will be required, to lead a seminar ;at '1~ast once per' term. ," ~ ,. ,

-' .. , ,.','.

Text Books: Villee : Biolo gy.

Refe rence Books: Weisz: The Elements of Biol:6gy. Foundations of Modern Biology Series. Certain periodicals, e. g. The Scientific American~

Method of Assessment - One three hour. paper at the end of the year. A practical examination may be required. . ).

---------- .. _---------------- --.~- --...... ~-----.--'.-- ------

Page 133: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

SOCIAL SCIENCES II & III 3/6/7 hours per week

130

Part (i) : Co:rnmerce - Book-Keeping Zhours per' week

';. ";.' "

1. Books of original entry.

2. Ledger postings.

3. The General Journal and adjusting entries.

4. Preparation of the Trial Balance.

S.Preparation of Trading Account, Profit and Loss Account,

6. The Balance Sheet.

7. Revenue Statements and the Balance Sheet presentation.

8. Multi-column cash books - school and canteen accounts.

9. Bank Reconciliation Statements.

10. Sectional Bala'ncing.

11. Auditing.

,AssiglUllents ~nd Essays- Regula~ exerci$es wil~ be completed-during the course. .

Text Books: Jam~s, W. E. ': New Way to Bciok-keeping Part I. Newtejc~' James, W. E. : New Way to Book-keeping Part II. Newtex. James, W. E. : Key Manual to Part I. Newtex. Yorston, Smyth and Brown: Elementary Accounting. Law Book Co.

Reference Books: . ,Yorston ,R. K. , Smith, E. B., Brown, S. R~:Elementary Accounting.

Law Book Go.' Gallagher, R. E. : Our Commercial Environment Book 1 and 2.

Angus and Robertson. Gallagher, R. E. : Accounting Solution:. Angus aild Robertson •

. Perrin, A. W.: Book-keeping for Secondary Students. Whitcombe Tombs.

Method of A,ssessJ:ll.ent - Progressive evaluation. . . ~ , '., '. .

Part (ii) : Commerce - Commercial Principles. 1 hour per week

, A· short cour'Se designed to iiltroduce students to the tecluii.!=al and legal background of the Section A in the Commerce Syllabus. The course will be divided into three series -

Series A - The Post Office Money and Banking Recovery of Money Ow~g­BusinesS Organization Insuranc:e

Se,r~es B - ,l..aw Q£,Contract A gen t and Principal Sale of Goods Common Carrier Ships and Shipping

Page 134: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

131 ---

,,~, Series C - "Aspects of the Australian Economy" -Trade Unions and Wages Conciliation and Arbitta.ti6n in Australia Bud,getary Policy in Australia. Government in Australia Aus~ralic;ls TradiI,lg f>o~ition,

TextBooks: Yorston 'and Fortescue :' Australian Mercantile Law (12th Ed. at

later). Law Book Co~ Yorston. R. K. : A Commercial Dictionary. Law Book, C,o.;

Method of Assessment - A- system of progressfve evaluation will be used throughout the course.

Part (iii) : Comin:erce Economic s Method 1 hour per 'week

A course almed at examining methods and proced~re s in the teaching of Economics.

(i) Lesson types -acquisition of knowledge expression -revision: testing.

(ii) Classroom practice -use of documents

-gr~ph's, diagl'a~s, charts, etc. ~xcursions, ,and resource persons

. survey work ' current topics, newspapers bulletin boards and library resourceS notebooks and assignments reference ,matedal and textbook use testingand~~iuati~n.· ,

(iii) Syllabus in Economics -aims and purposes arrangement of subject material

'planning a 'course' a master plan of skills.

Text Books:

, , .l;

Edwards. G. J. et al : The Teaching of Economics. Economics Association, U. K.

Reference Books: Economics. Journal of the Economics Teachers' Association of

N.S.W.

Method of Assessment - A system of progressive evaluation will be used throughout the course.

Part (iv) : Geo graphy and Method 3 hours per week

Aspects treated will include -(i) The scope and content of geography and its place in the

curriculum • (ii) Examination of the syllabuses in geography.

(iii) Planning of programmes.

- ~--".--------.---- ----."~-" .. ------------ ----- ------ -~------

Page 135: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

132

(iv) Methods of pre:senting" consolidating and testing information and skills.

(v) Fieldstudi,es and visual aids. (vi) Professional growth of geography teacher •.

Assignments and Essays -(a) Short exercises covering lesson plans, cOmmentaries on observations

and techniques, interpretation of syllabuses and programming. (bl An investigation into one, aspect of content of the School Certificate

Syilabus (approx., 2000 words).

Reference Books: Wise :. Geo graphy and the Teacher. Briault and Shave: Geography in and out of Schools. Gopsill : The Teaching of Geography. Chorley and Haggett: Frontiers in Geog,raphy Tea,ching. U. N. E. S. C. O. : Source Bookfor GeograPhy Teachers.· Biddle Ed. : Readings in Geographical Education.

lvIethod of Assessment - Progressive evaluation.

Part (v) : History 3 hours per week

A course in Australian History in which the following problems will be examined:

(i) Vlhat is an Australian today? (ii) Who lived in Australia first?

(iii) How did the Europeans discover the nature of the continent? (iv) The Social Structure of 'AUstralia in 1838, U~88, 1938. (v) The Influence of F'articu1ar Forces in the Community.

Assignments and Essays - one essay, 1000 words. Two essays, 500 words. One essay, 15.00 words.,

,. . .. ',-"

Text Books: Clark, C. 1\;i. : Select Documents in Australian History, Vols. I &: II.

Reference Books: Ward, R. : The Australian Legend. Clark, C. M. H. : Australia.

Method of Assessment - By means of regular assignments.

Page 136: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

133

ON~-YEAR PROFESSI0NALCQURS~S .(XU) PROPOSED FOR 1910

1.. Students who have compl~ted th~e,e. fou.r or five units towards a university degree, and who elect to prepare for teaching in Primary or Infant Depart-

. ments, will undertake the ;first year programme of the Primary or Infant course. Spccessfulstudents in this course . may be recommended for a 2-year certificate, the university prepar~tion being accepted as equivalent to one year of the college course.

2. Students who have completed three, four or five units towards a university degree, and who elect to prepare for teaching in secondary schools, may complete a professional year in one of two ways:

(a) They may be enrolled in the first year of the appropriate college secondary course, e. g. Geography/Commerce, Mathematics, etc. and on successful completion be eligible fqr a 2-year certificate.

or (b) They may be enrolled in a course structured like that set out in paragraph 3 below and on successful completion be eligible for a 2-year certificate.

The decision may depend on many factors such as number of years of study of each teaching subject, availability of staff, vacancies in courses.

3. Students who have completed six, seven or eight units towards a university degree, and who elect to teach in Primary or Infant Departments, will undertake the first-year programme of the Primary or Infant course. Successful students may be recommended for a 3-year certificate, the university preparation being accepted as equivalent to two years of the colle ge course.

NOTE: Students who graduate afterwards may be granted 4-year status.

4. Students who have completed six, seven or eight units towards a university degree, including at least two teaching subjects each studied for two years, and who elect to teach in secondary schools, will undertake a course which specialises in the teaching of those subjects. Successful students may be recommended for a 3-year certificate.

The lecture programme is tabulated below:

Subject

Education English Health Education Physical Education

Curriculum at lvlethod Subject 1 Subject 11 Pedagogy Dems/Observations

Total

Hrs/wk

6 2 1 2

4 or 5 4 or 5

1 2

22

The subjects chosen must be available on the college timetable so that the student can attend lectures without hindrance and. in addition, Heads of Departments'may prescribe additional qualifying or alternative studies where considered necessary. 1£ a student is successful later in completing a university degree this, with the one year professional course. is qualification for 4-year trained status.

Page 137: THREE, YEAR COURSES OF PREPARATION · School Certificate examination, the College p~ovides tertiary courses for intending teachers.' - During his preparation at College,:·the student

134 '

5. G~~,¢I:~a.t~fI~ wh9~cl,~sire tQ ,<;;Qnl.plete aCQUe g.e'profe sSional year and elect to follow courses -

(a);iri. Primary or lrifantteaching, will undertake the first-year pro~ramn:ie In the chosen course;'

, (b) in Secondary teaching, and who have included in their degree, at least two teaching subjects studied for two years I will undertake a course

,which -speCialises in the teaching of those subjects.

The structure of this fourth year course is the same as that set out in par~graph ( above. . ' , .

S370 127 498

;.'.; 'i,:':":

,..1:: .

, . ~ .: .

...... ,'

': ,.